B-ClassOperator's Manual

Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are

registered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Prince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered

trademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are

registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of

iBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are

registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual, you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

Display This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow theinstructions and warning notices in thismanual. Ignoring them could result in damageto the vehicle or personal injury to you orothers.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2465840000 É2465840000bËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 20

At a glance ........................................... 27

Safety ................................................... 37

Opening and closing ........................... 67

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 85

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97

Climate control ................................. 117

Driving and parking .......................... 133

On-board computer and displays .... 185

Stowage and features ...................... 235

Maintenance and care ...................... 265

Breakdown assistance ..................... 279

Wheels and tires ............................... 297

Technical data ................................... 327

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 201Function/notes ................................ 59Important safety notes .................... 59Warning lamp ................................. 225

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 123Active Parking Assist

Canceling ....................................... 176Detecting parking spaces .............. 173Display message ............................ 216Exiting a parking space .................. 175Function/notes ............................. 173Important safety notes .................. 172Parking .......................................... 174

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 61Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 62Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 212Function/notes ............................. 102Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 197

Additional speedometer ................... 196Additives (engine oil) ........................ 332Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 39Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 42Important safety notes .................... 41Knee bag .......................................... 44Safety guidelines ............................. 40Side impact air bag .......................... 44Window curtain air bag .................... 45

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 130Rear ............................................... 131Setting ........................................... 130

Setting the center air vents ........... 130Setting the side air vents ............... 130

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 197

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ashtray ............................................... 249Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 194ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 270Hiding a service message .............. 270Notes ............................................. 270Resetting the service intervaldisplay ........................................... 270Service message ............................ 270Special service requirements ......... 271

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 65Function ........................................... 65Switching off the alarm .................... 65

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 195Display message ............................ 215Function/notes ............................. 180

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 192Audio system

see separate operating instructions Authorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 211see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 137Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 137Automatic headlamp mode ................ 99

4 Index

Automatic transmissionAutomatic drive program ............... 144Changing gear ............................... 143DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 140Display message ............................ 220Drive program display .................... 141Driving tips .................................... 143Emergency running mode .............. 147Engaging drive position .................. 142Engaging neutral ............................ 141Engaging reverse gear ................... 141Engaging the park position ............ 141Holding the vehicle stationary onuphill gradients .............................. 143Kickdown ....................................... 143Manual drive program .................... 144Overview ........................................ 140Problem (malfunction) ................... 147Program selector button ................ 143Pulling away ................................... 136Starting the engine ........................ 135Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 144Transmission position display ........ 141Transmission positions .................. 142

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 147

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 109Display message ............................ 211

Bag hook ............................................ 243BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 59Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 70Important safety notes .................... 70Replacing ......................................... 70

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 288Display message ............................ 213Important safety notes .................. 285Jump starting ................................. 289

Belt force limiterActivation ......................................... 49Function ........................................... 49

Blindssee Roller sunblind

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 195Display message ............................ 216Notes/function .............................. 181

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 207Notes ............................................. 332

Brake lampsAdaptive ........................................... 62Changing bulbs .............................. 109Display message ............................ 209

BrakesABS .................................................. 59Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61BAS .................................................. 59Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 332Display message ............................ 201Driving tips .................................... 154Important safety notes .................. 154Maintenance .................................. 155Parking brake ................................ 150Warning lamp ................................. 225

Breakdownsee Flat tire see Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Changing bulbs

CCalling up a malfunction

see Display messages Car

see Vehicle Care

Carpets .......................................... 277Car wash ........................................ 271Display ........................................... 275Exhaust pipe .................................. 275Exterior lights ................................ 274Gear or selector lever .................... 276Interior ........................................... 275Matte finish ................................... 273Notes ............................................. 271Paint .............................................. 273Plastic trim .................................... 276

Index 5

Power washer ................................ 272Rear view camera .......................... 275Roof lining ...................................... 277Seat belt ........................................ 277Seat cover ..................................... 276Sensors ......................................... 275Steering wheel ............................... 276Trim pieces .................................... 276Washing by hand ........................... 272Wheels ........................................... 273Windows ........................................ 274Wiper blades .................................. 274Wooden trim .................................. 276

Cargo compartment cover ............... 244Cargo compartment enlargement . . . 240

Important safety notes .................. 240Notes on use ................................. 242

Cargo compartment floorHeight adjustment ......................... 246Important safety notes .................. 245Opening/closing ............................ 246Stowage well (under) ..................... 245

Cargo netAttaching ....................................... 245Important safety information ......... 245

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 243Car wash (care) ................................. 271Center console

Lower section .................................. 33Upper section .................................. 32

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 198Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 68

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 109Cornering light function ................. 108High-beam headlamps ................... 107Important safety notes .................. 104License plate lighting ..................... 111Low-beam headlamps .................... 107Overview of bulb types .................. 105Parking lamps ................................ 108Rear fog lamp ................................ 109Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 106Reversing lamps ............................ 109Standing lamps (front) ................... 108

Tail lamps ...................................... 109Turn signals (front) ......................... 108Turn signals (rear) .......................... 109

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 57Rear doors ....................................... 58

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 50Restraint systems ............................ 50

Child seatAutomatic recognition ..................... 53LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 54On the front-passenger seat ............ 52Problem (malfunction) ..................... 57Top Tether ....................................... 55

Cigarette lighter ................................ 250Climate control

Automatic climate control ............. 119Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 121Controlling automatically ............... 125Cooling with air dehumidification . . 123Defrosting the windows ................. 127Defrosting the windshield .............. 127Important safety notes .................. 118Indicator lamp ................................ 125Maximum cooling .......................... 127Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ................................... 120, 122Overview of systems ...................... 118Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 125Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 129Refrigerant ..................................... 334Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 335Setting the air distribution ............. 126Setting the airflow ......................... 126Setting the air vents ...................... 130Setting the temperature ................ 125Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 129Switching on/off ........................... 123Switching residual heat on/off ...... 129

6 Index

Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 128Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 126

CockpitOverview .......................................... 28see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTDisplay message ............................ 201Operation/notes .............................. 60

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 100Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 264Calling up ....................................... 263Setting ........................................... 263

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 189Convenience closing feature .............. 78Convenience opening feature ............ 78Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 269Display message ............................ 212Filling capacity ............................... 333Important safety notes .................. 333Temperature gauge ........................ 186Warning lamp ................................. 231

Coolingsee Climate control

Cornering light functionChanging bulbs .............................. 108Display message ............................ 209Function/notes ............................. 101

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 104Cruise control

Activation conditions ..................... 158Cruise control lever ....................... 158Deactivating ................................... 159Display message ............................ 218Driving system ............................... 157Function/notes ............................. 158Important safety notes .................. 157Setting a speed .............................. 159Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 158

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 248Important safety notes .................. 247Rear compartment ......................... 248

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24Customer Relations Department ....... 24

DDashboard

see Instrument cluster Dashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lighting Data

see Technical data Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 211Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 197Switching on/off (switch) ................ 99

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 23Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 198Interior lighting .............................. 198

Diagnostics connection ...................... 24Digital speedometer ......................... 190DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmission Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 275Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 270Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 200Driving systems ............................. 215Engine ............................................ 212General notes ................................ 200Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 200Lights ............................................. 208Safety systems .............................. 201SmartKey ....................................... 223Tires ............................................... 219Vehicle ........................................... 220

Distance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 194

Index 7

Distance recorder ............................. 189see Odometer see Trip odometer

Distance warning functionActivating/deactivating ................. 195Function/notes ................................ 60Warning lamp ................................. 233

DISTRONIC PLUSActivation conditions ..................... 161Cruise control lever ....................... 161Deactivating ................................... 165Display message ............................ 217Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 163Driving tips .................................... 166Function/notes ............................. 160Important safety notes .................. 159Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 165Warning lamp ................................. 233

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 198Automatic locking (switch) ............... 74Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 68Control panel ................................... 35Display message ............................ 222Emergency locking ........................... 75Emergency unlocking ....................... 75Important safety notes .................... 73Opening (from inside) ...................... 73

Drinking and driving ......................... 152Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 144Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 141Manual ........................................... 144

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 271Symmetrical low beam .................... 98

Driving on flooded roads .................. 156Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 62

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .. . . 60Distance warning function ............... 60Electronic brake force distribution ... 64ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .................................... 62, 63ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 62Important safety information ........... 59Overview .......................................... 58STEER CONTROL ............................. 64

Driving systemsActive Parking Assist ..................... 172ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 180Blind Spot Assist ............................ 181Cruise control ................................ 157Display message ............................ 215DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 159HOLD function ............................... 167Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 183Lane Tracking package .................. 181PARKTRONIC ................................. 169Rear view camera .......................... 176

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 143Brakes ........................................... 154Break-in period .............................. 134Checking brake lining thickness .... 155DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 166Downhill gradient ........................... 154Drinking and driving ....................... 152Driving abroad ................................. 98Driving in winter ............................. 157Driving on flooded roads ................ 156Driving on wet roads ...................... 156Exhaust check ............................... 152Fuel ................................................ 152General .......................................... 152Hydroplaning ................................. 156Icy road surfaces ........................... 157Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 154Snow chains .................................. 301Symmetrical low beam .................... 98Wet road surface ........................... 154

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 192DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 193

8 Index

EEASY-VARIO-PLUS system

Cargo compartment enlargement . . 240EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 203Function/notes ................................ 64

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 153On-board computer ....................... 190

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 137Automatic engine switch-off .......... 137Deactivating/activating ................. 138General information ....................... 136Important safety notes .................. 136

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 75Vehicle ............................................. 75

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 325Important safety notes .................. 325Removing ....................................... 326Technical data ............................... 326

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 39Function ........................................... 49Safety guidelines ............................. 40

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 76

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 21

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 231Display message ............................ 212ECO start/stop function ................ 136Engine number ............................... 329Irregular running ............................ 139Jump-starting ................................. 289Starting problems .......................... 139Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 135Switching off .................................. 150Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 294

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 139

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 268Additives ........................................ 332Checking the oil level ..................... 267Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 268Display message ............................ 214Filling capacity ............................... 332Notes about oil grades ................... 332Notes on oil level/consumption .... 267Viscosity ........................................ 332

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

Deactivating/activating ................. 194Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 63Display message ............................ 201ETS .................................................. 62Function/notes ......................... 62, 63Important safety information ........... 62Warning lamp ................................. 227

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 62Exhaust check ................................... 152Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 275Exterior lighting

Setting options ................................ 98see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 92Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 93Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 93Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 199Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 93Setting ............................................. 93Storing settings (memory function) .. 95Storing the parking position ............. 94

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 237

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ......................................... 280Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 281

Index 9

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 281TIREFIT kit ...................................... 282see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 264Fog lamps

Extended range .............................. 102Switching on/off .............................. 99

Folding table ...................................... 239Front fog lamps

Display message ............................ 210Switching on/off .............................. 99

Front-passenger seatFolding the backrest forward/back 239

FuelAdditives ........................................ 331Consumption statistics .................. 189Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 190Displaying the range ...................... 190Driving tips .................................... 152Fuel gauge ....................................... 29Grade (gasoline) ............................ 330Important safety notes .................. 330Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 330Problem (malfunction) ................... 149Refueling ........................................ 147Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 330

Fuel filler flapOpening/closing ............................ 148

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 190

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 330Problem (malfunction) ................... 149

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 295Before changing ............................. 294Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 294Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 295Important safety notes .................. 294

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 263Important safety notes .................. 260Opening/closing the garage door .. 262Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 260

Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 276Genuine parts ...................................... 20Glove box ........................................... 237

HHandbrake

see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 101

Display message ............................ 223Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 269Cleaning system (function) ............ 101Cleaning system (notes) ................ 334Fogging up ..................................... 103see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ......................................... 89Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 89Adjusting (manually) ........................ 89Adjusting (rear) ................................ 90Installing/removing (rear) ................ 90

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 107Display message ............................ 210Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 102Switching on/off ........................... 100

Hill start assist .................................. 136HOLD function

Deactivating ................................... 168Display message ............................ 215Function/notes ............................. 168

HoodClosing ........................................... 267Display message ............................ 222

10 Index

Important safety notes .................. 266Opening ......................................... 266

Hydroplaning ..................................... 156

IIgnition lock

see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 64Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 29Settings ......................................... 196Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 186Interior lighting ................................. 103

Automatic control .......................... 104Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 198Emergency lighting ........................ 104Manual control ............................... 104Overview ........................................ 103Reading lamp ................................. 103Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 197

JJack

Storage location ............................ 280Using ............................................. 320

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 289

KKickdown

Driving tips .................................... 143Manual drive program .................... 146

Knee bag .............................................. 44

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 195Display message ............................ 215Function/information .................... 183

Lane Tracking package ..................... 181LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 54License plate lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 111License plate lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 210Light function, active

Display message ............................ 211Lighting

Light switch ..................................... 98Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 198Automatic headlamp mode .............. 99Cornering light function ................. 101Display message ............................ 208Driving abroad ................................. 98Fog lamps ........................................ 99Fog lamps (extended) .................... 102Hazard warning lamps ................... 101High beam flasher .......................... 101High-beam headlamps ................... 100Low-beam headlamps ...................... 99Parking lamps ................................ 100Rear fog lamp ................................ 100Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 197Standing lamps .............................. 100Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 197Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board computer) 197Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 99Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 198

Index 11

Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 198Turn signals ................................... 100see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting

Light sensor (display message) ....... 211Loading guidelines ............................ 236Locking

see Central locking Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 74Emergency locking ........................... 75From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 74

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 199Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 107Display message ............................ 209Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................... 98Switching on/off .............................. 99

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 90

MM+S tires ............................................ 300Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction message

see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 273mbrace

Call priority .................................... 255Display message ............................ 207Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 256Downloading routes ....................... 259Emergency call .............................. 253Geo fencing ................................... 259Important safety notes .................. 251Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 258MB info call button ........................ 255Remote vehicle locking .................. 257

Roadside Assistance button .......... 254Search & Send ............................... 256Self-test ......................................... 252Speed alert .................................... 259System .......................................... 252Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 260Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 258Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 257

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 69Locking vehicle ................................ 75Unlocking the driver's door .............. 75

Memory card (audio) ......................... 192Memory function ................................. 95Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 200Messages

see Display messages Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 193

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 69MOExtended tires .............................. 281Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 322Mounting a new wheel ................... 322Preparing the vehicle ..................... 319Raising the vehicle ......................... 320Removing a wheel .......................... 322Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 320

MP3Operation ....................................... 192see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 188Permanent display ......................... 197

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 187Overview .......................................... 31

12 Index

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 191see separate operating instructions

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 134

OOccupant safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 50Important safety notes .................... 38

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerAssistance menu ........................... 194Audio menu ................................... 192Convenience submenu .................. 199Displaying a service message ........ 270Display messages .......................... 200Factory settings submenu ............. 199Important safety notes .................. 186Instrument cluster submenu .......... 196Lighting submenu .......................... 197Menu overview .............................. 189Message memory .......................... 200Navigation menu ............................ 191Operation ....................................... 187Service menu ................................. 196Settings menu ............................... 196Standard display ............................ 189Telephone menu ............................ 193Trip menu ...................................... 189Vehicle submenu ........................... 198Video DVD operation ..................... 193

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 109Operating system

see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 187Overhead control panel ...................... 34Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 58

PPaint code number ............................ 328Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 273Panic alarm .......................................... 38

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing the rollersunblind ........................................... 82Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82Resetting ......................................... 82

Panorama sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 80

Parcel net ........................................... 239Parking ............................................... 149

Important safety notes .................. 149Parking brake ................................ 150Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 94Rear view camera .......................... 176see Active Parking Assist see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 172see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 203Electric parking brake .................... 150Warning lamp ................................. 230

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 100

Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 108PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 171Driving system ............................... 169Function/notes ............................. 169Important safety notes .................. 169Problem (malfunction) ................... 172Range of the sensors ..................... 169Warning display ............................. 170

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 53Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 276Power washers .................................. 272Power windows

see Side windows Program selector button .................. 143Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 20Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 136

Index 13

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 24

RRadar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 199Display message ............................ 215

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 192see separate operating instructions

Reading lamp ..................................... 103Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 131Rear fog lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 109Display message ............................ 210Switching on/off ........................... 100

Rear lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 109see Lights

Rear seatAdjusting the angle of thebackrests ....................................... 242Folding the backrest forwards/back (vehicles without the EASY-VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 240Folding the backrest forwards/back (vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 241Fore-and-aft adjustment ................ 243

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 275Function/notes ............................. 176Switching on/off ........................... 177

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) .......................... 92Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 129Switching on/off ........................... 128

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 113Switching on/off ........................... 112

Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem)

Important safety notes .................. 334

RefuelingFuel gauge ....................................... 29Important safety notes .................. 147Refueling process .......................... 148see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 260Programming (garage door opener) 260

Reporting safety defects .................... 25Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 214Warning lamp ................................. 231see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 129Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 80Roller sunblinds ............................... 81Side windows ................................... 77

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 22Roller sunblind

Opening/closing .............................. 82Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 81

Roof carrier ........................................ 247Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 277Roof load (maximum) ........................ 335Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 191

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 50Child restraint systems .................... 50

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SeatFolding the backrest (rearcompartment) forwards/back

14 Index

(vehicles without the EASY-VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 240Folding the backrest (rearcompartment) forwards/back(vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUS system) ................................ 241

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 48Belt force limiters ............................ 49center rear-compartment seat ......... 48Cleaning ......................................... 277Correct usage .................................. 46Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 49Fastening ......................................... 47Important safety guidelines ............. 45Releasing ......................................... 48Safety guidelines ............................. 40Warning lamp ................................. 224Warning lamp (function) ................... 49

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 88Adjusting (manually) ........................ 88Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 90Adjusting the head restraint ............ 89Cleaning the cover ......................... 276Correct driver's seat position ........... 86Important safety notes .................... 87Seat heating problem ...................... 91Storing settings (memory function) .. 95Switching seat heating on/off ......... 91

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 275Service menu (on-board computer) . 196Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 332Coolant (engine) ............................ 333Engine oil ....................................... 332Fuel ................................................ 330Important safety notes .................. 329Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 334Washer fluid ................................... 334

Service worksee ASSYST PLUS

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 199On-board computer ....................... 196

Setting the air distribution ............... 126

Setting the airflow ............................ 126Side impact air bag ............................. 44Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 211Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 274Convenience closing feature ............ 78Convenience opening feature .......... 78Important safety information ........... 77Opening/closing .............................. 77Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79Resetting ......................................... 79

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 70Changing the programming ............. 69Checking the battery ....................... 70Convenience closing feature ............ 78Convenience opening feature .......... 78Display message ............................ 223Door central locking/unlocking ....... 68Important safety notes .................... 68Loss ................................................. 72Mechanical key ................................ 69Positions (ignition lock) ................. 135Problem (malfunction) ..................... 72Starting the engine ........................ 135

SmartKey positions (ignition lock) . . 135Snow chains ...................................... 301Sockets

Center console .............................. 251Luggage compartment ................... 251Points to observe before use ......... 250Rear compartment ......................... 251

Specialist workshop ............................ 24Speed, controlling

see Cruise control Speedometer

Activating/deactivating theadditional speedometer ................. 196Digital ............................................ 190In the Instrument cluster ................. 29Segments ...................................... 187Selecting the unit of measurement 196see Instrument cluster

Index 15

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 207Introduction ..................................... 38Warning lamp ................................. 230Warning lamp (function) ................... 39

Standing lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 108Display message ............................ 210Switching on/off ........................... 100

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 135STEER CONTROL .................................. 64Steering (display message) .............. 222Steering wheel

Adjusting (manually) ........................ 91Button overview ............................... 31Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 187Cleaning ......................................... 276Important safety notes .................... 91Paddle shifters ............................... 144

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 144Stowage areas ................................... 237Stowage compartments

Armrest (front) ............................... 238Armrest (under) ............................. 238Center console .............................. 237Cup holders ................................... 247Eyeglasses compartment ............... 237Glove box ....................................... 237Important safety information ......... 237Parcel net ...................................... 239Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 238

Stowage spaceCenter console (rear) ..................... 238

Summer tires ..................................... 300Sun visor ............................................ 249Supplemental Restraint System

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 198Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 129Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 65

TTachometer ........................................ 187Tailgate

Display message ............................ 222Emergency unlocking ....................... 76Important safety notes .................... 75Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 76Opening dimensions ...................... 335

Tail lampsDisplay message ............................ 210see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 29

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 329Emergency spare wheel ................. 326Information .................................... 328Tires/wheels ................................. 323Vehicle data ................................... 335

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 255Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 256Downloading routes ....................... 259Emergency call .............................. 253Geo fencing ................................... 259Important safety notes .................. 251Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 258MB info call button ........................ 255Remote vehicle locking .................. 257Roadside Assistance button .......... 254Search & Send ............................... 256Self-test ......................................... 252Speed alert .................................... 259System .......................................... 252Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 260Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 258Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 257

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 193Display message ............................ 222Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193Number from the phone book ........ 194Redialing ........................................ 194Rejecting/ending a call ................. 194

16 Index

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 186Outside temperature ...................... 187Setting (climate control) ................ 125

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 65Immobilizer ...................................... 64

Through-loading ................................ 239Time

see separate operating instructions TIREFIT kit .......................................... 282Tire pressure

Checking manually ........................ 305Display message ............................ 219Maximum ....................................... 304Notes ............................................. 303Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 284Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 284Recommended ............................... 301

Tire pressure loss warningsystem

Important safety notes .................. 305Restarting ...................................... 305

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 318Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 316Bar (definition) ............................... 316Changing a wheel .......................... 319Characteristics .............................. 316Checking ........................................ 299Definition of terms ......................... 316Direction of rotation ...................... 319Display message ............................ 219Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 318DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 315DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 316GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 317GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 317GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 317Important safety notes .................. 298

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 316Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 317Labeling (overview) ........................ 312Load bearing index (definition) ...... 318Load index ..................................... 315Load index (definition) ................... 317M+S tires ....................................... 300Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 317Maximum load on a tire (definition) 317Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 317Maximum tire load ......................... 310Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 317MOExtended tires .......................... 300Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 318PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 317Replacing ....................................... 319Service life ..................................... 300Sidewall (definition) ....................... 318Speed rating (definition) ................ 317Storing ........................................... 319Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 316Summer tires ......................... 157, 300Temperature .................................. 312TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 318Tire bead (definition) ...................... 318Tire pressure (definition) ................ 318Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 316Tire size (data) ............................... 323Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 313Tire tread ....................................... 299Tire tread (definition) ..................... 318Total load limit (definition) ............. 318Traction ......................................... 311Traction (definition) ....................... 318Tread wear ..................................... 311Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 311Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 316Unladen weight (definition) ............ 317

Index 17

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 318Wheel rim (definition) .................... 316see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 55Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 291Installing the towing eye ................ 292Removing the towing eye ............... 292

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 293With front axle raised ..................... 293

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 294Important safety notes .................. 291Installing the towing eye ................ 292Removing the towing eye ............... 292

Traction control ................................... 62Transmission

see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 141Transporting the vehicle .................. 293Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 276Trip computer (on-board computer) 189Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 189Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 190

Trunksee Tailgate

Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 108Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 109Display message ............................ 209Switching on/off ........................... 100

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 75From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 74

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 249Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 24Data acquisition ............................... 25Equipment ....................................... 21Individual settings .......................... 196Limited Warranty ............................. 25Loading .......................................... 306Locking (in an emergency) ............... 75Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 68Lowering ........................................ 322Maintenance .................................... 22Parking for a long period ................ 152Pulling away ................................... 136Raising ........................................... 320Reporting problems ......................... 24Securing from rolling away ............ 320Towing away .................................. 291Tow-starting ................................... 291Transporting .................................. 293Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 75Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 68Vehicle data ................................... 335

Vehicle data ....................................... 335Vehicle dimensions ........................... 335Vehicle emergency locking ................ 75Vehicle identification number

see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 328Vehicle tool kit .................................. 280Video (DVD) ........................................ 193VIN ...................................................... 328

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 225Brakes ........................................... 225Check Engine ................................. 231Coolant .......................................... 231Distance warning ........................... 233DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 233ESP® .............................................. 227ESP® OFF ....................................... 228Fuel tank ........................................ 231Overview .......................................... 30

18 Index

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 53Reserve fuel ................................... 231Seat belt ........................................ 224SRS ................................................ 230

Warranty ............................................ 328Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 223Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 322Wheel chock ...................................... 320Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 319Checking ........................................ 299Cleaning ......................................... 273Cleaning (warning) ......................... 319Emergency spare wheel ................. 325Important safety notes .................. 298Interchanging/changing ................ 319Mounting a new wheel ................... 322Mounting a wheel .......................... 319Removing a wheel .......................... 322Storing ........................................... 319Tightening torque ........................... 322Wheel size/tire size ....................... 323

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 208Operation ......................................... 45

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 127

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 269Notes ............................................. 334

Windshield wipersDisplay message ............................ 223Problem (malfunction) ................... 115Rear window wiper ........................ 112Replacing the wiper blades ............ 112Switching on/off ........................... 111

Winter drivingSlippery road surfaces ................... 157Snow chains .................................. 301

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 300

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 300

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 274Important safety notes .................. 112Replacing (rear window) ................ 113Replacing (windshield) ................... 113

Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 276Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 126

Index 19

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one ofcomprehensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel

consumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressures

are correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer need

them.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel

consumption.

Environmental concerns andrecommendations

Wherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditioned majorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems, may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.

20 Introduction

Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has beenspecifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts for necessary service and repair work.In addition, strategically located partsdelivery centers provide quick and reliableparts service.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 328) and the enginenumber (Y page 329) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual

General notesBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthis manual. Disregarding them may lead todamage to the vehicle or personal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all features described.This also applies to safety-related systemsand functions. The equipment in your vehiclemay therefore differ from some of thedescriptions or illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerif you have any questions about equipment oroperation.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)

Introduction 21

Z

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownership

In the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

22 Introduction

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any requiredrepairs carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of othernetworked components. In particular,systems relevant to safety could also beaffected. As a result, these may no longerfunction as intended and/or jeopardize theoperating safety of the vehicle. There is anincreased risk of an accident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high

curb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

curb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage or

parts of the chassis.

In situations like this, the body, theundercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damage beingvisible. Components damaged in this way canunexpectedly fail or, in the case of anaccident, no longer withstand the strain theyare designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves, grassor twigs can gather between the underbodyand the underbody paneling. If thesematerials come in contact with hot parts ofthe exhaust system for an extended period,they can catch fire.Have the vehicle checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. If on continuing your journey younotice that driving safety is impaired, pull overand stop the vehicle immediately, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,

Introduction 23

Z

including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to adiagnostics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions testduring the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the work

required on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and

modificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information whendriving your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In Canada

24 Introduction

Customer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual

about the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle

(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Your vehicle records electronic data. If yourvehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event ofan accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access this data and submitit:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecuting

authoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes that

involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its salesand service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by law.Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on thefollowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 25

Z

26

Dashboard ........................................... 28Instrument cluster .............................. 29Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31Center console .................................... 32Overhead control panel ...................... 34Door control panel .............................. 35

27

At a

gla

nce

Dashboard

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 144

; Combination switch 100

= Instrument cluster 29

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 140

B PARKTRONIC warningdisplay 169

C Overhead control panel 34

D Climate control systems 118

Function PageE Ignition lock 135

F Adjusting the steeringwheel 91

G Cruise control lever 158

H Electric parking brake 150

I Light switch 98

J Diagnostics connection 24

K Opening the hood 266

28 DashboardAt

a g

lanc

e

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Speedometer with

segments 187

; Multifunction display 188

= Tachometer 187

Function Page? Coolant temperature 186

A Fuel gauge

B Instrument cluster lighting 186

Instrument cluster 29

At a

gla

nce

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: L Low-beam

headlamps 99

; T Parking lamps 100

= K High-beamheadlamps 100

? ÷ ESP® 227

A ! Electric parking brake(red) 230

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 230

C · Distance warning 233

D #! Turn signals 100

Function PageE 6 SRS 230

F ü Seat belt 224

G ? Coolant 231

H R Rear fog lamp 100

I N Front fog lamps 99

J ; Check Engine 231

K æ Reserve fuel 231

L å ESP® OFF 227

M ! ABS 225

N J Brakes 225

30 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 188

; Audio/COMAND display;see the separate operatinginstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 193Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 1879:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 187a

Confirms your selection 187Hides display messages 200

B %

Back 187Switches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 31

At a

gla

nce

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: Audio system/COMAND;

see the separate operatinginstructions

; c Seat heating 91

= c PARKTRONIC 169

? ¤ ECO start/stopfunction 136

Function PageA £ Hazard warning

lamps 101

B 4 PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamp 53

C Ú Selects the driveprogram 143

32 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Center console, lower section

Function PageD Ashtray 249

Cigarette lighter 250Socket 250Stowage compartment 237

E Stowage compartment 237

Function PageF Cup holder 247

G Stowage compartment 237

H Audio/COMANDcontroller; see the separateoperating instructions

Center console 33

At a

gla

nce

Overhead control panel

Function Page: u Switches the rear

compartment interiorlighting on/off 104

; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 103

= | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 104

? ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 255

A Rear-view mirror 92

B Buttons for the garage dooropener 262

C G SOS button (mbracesystem) 253

Function PageD F Roadside Assistance

call button (mbracesystem) 254

E Eyeglasses compartment 237

F 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 81

G c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 104

H p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 103

34 Overhead control panelAt

a g

lanc

e

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 73

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 74

= r45= Savesthe seat and exterior mirrorsettings 95

? Adjusts the seatselectrically 88

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds theexterior mirrors in/outelectrically 92

Function PageB W Opens/closes the

side windows 77

C n Activates/deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 58

Door control panel 35

At a

gla

nce

36

Useful information .............................. 38Panic alarm .......................................... 38Occupant safety .................................. 38Children in the vehicle ........................ 50Driving safety systems ....................... 58Theft deterrent locking system ......... 64

37

Safe

ty

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press ! button : for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press ! button :again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering with

interconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

In this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:RSeat beltsRChild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing

systemAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RAir bag system components with the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampThe different air bag systems workindependently of each other. The protectivefunctions of the system work in conjunctionwith each other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 50).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)

38 Occupant safetySa

fety

REmergency Tensioning Device for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in therearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat

belts and the outer seat belts in the rearSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with parts of the vehicle's interiorin the event of an accident. It can also reducethe effect of the forces to which occupantsare subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGThe SRS self-check has detected amalfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:Rdoes not light up at allRdoes not go out after approximately four

seconds after the engine is startedRlights up after the engine is started or while

the vehicle is in motionFor your safety, Mercedes-Benz stronglyrecommends that you have the systemchecked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. SRS may otherwise failto activate when it is needed in the event ofan accident, which could lead to serious orfatal injuries. SRS might also be activatedunexpectedly and unnecessarily, which couldalso result in injury.In addition, work carried out improperly onSRS may render SRS inoperative or causeunintended air bag deployment. Work on theSRS system should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel. Consult aqualified specialist workshop.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor details. USA only: for further information,contact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switched

on. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.SRS functions are checked regularly when theignition is switched on or the engine isrunning. Therefore, malfunctions can bedetected in good time.

Triggering of Emergency TensioningDevice and air bagsDuring the first stage of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates important physicaldata relating to vehicle deceleration oracceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRmagnitudeBased on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers theEmergency Tensioning Device in the firststage.If there is an even higher rate of vehicledeceleration or acceleration in a longitudinaldirection, the front air bags are also deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The air bag control unit evaluatesvehicle deceleration or acceleration in theevent of a collision. In the first deploymentstage, the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is reached within a fewmilliseconds.The Emergency Tensioning Device and air bagtriggering thresholds are variable and areadapted to the detected rate of decelerationor acceleration of the vehicle. This process ispre-emptive in nature. The triggering processmust take place in good time at the start ofthe collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the direction of the force areessentially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the

collisionRthe collision angle

Occupant safety 39

Safe

ty

Z

Rthe deformation characteristics of thevehicleRthe characteristics of the object with which

the vehicle has collidedFactors that can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag,nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantly,e.g. the hood or the fender, without an air bagbeing deployed. This is the case if only partswhich are relatively easily deformed areaffected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bags may be deployedeven though the vehicle suffers only minordeformation. This is the case if, for example,very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinalbody members are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.

i The front Emergency Tensioning Devicescan only be triggered if the seat belttongues on the front seats are correctlyengaged in the seat belt buckles.

i Not all air bags are deployed in anaccident. The different air bag systemswork independently of each other.How the air bag system works isdetermined by predicting the severity ofthe accident, especially vehicledeceleration or acceleration, and the typeof accident:Rhead-on collisionRside impactRrollover

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat belts

installed or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check your national disposalguidelines. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash, they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RDo not make any modifications to the SRS

wiring or components.RDo not modify or remove any components

or parts of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. to the:- padded steering wheel boss- knee bag covers- front-passenger air bag cover- outer side of front seat bolsters- outer seat bolsters of the rear bench seat

backrest- roof frame trimRDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep the area between the air bags and

occupants free of objects (e.g. packages,handbags, umbrellas etc.).RDo not hang any objects such as coat

hangers on the coat hooks or the grabhandle above the door. These items may bethrown around in the vehicle and cause

40 Occupant safetySa

fety

head and other injuries when the windowcurtain air bag is deployed.RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever rest your feet on the dashboard or

the seat. Always keep both feet on the floorin front of the seat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These are available from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-

passenger front air bags and driver's kneebag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags and

window curtain air bags)Rrollover (window curtain air bags)

However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potentialbreathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt and make surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and

in a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm). Youshould be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. If

Occupant safety 41

Safe

ty

Z

you have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.

Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back

as possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious or fatal injuries should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint or boosterseat recommended for the size and weightof the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

G WARNINGAccident research shows that the safest placefor children in an automobile is in a rear seat.A side impact air bag related injury may occurif occupants, especially children, are notproperly seated or restrained when next to aside impact air bag which needs to deployrapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possibleand use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelysized child restraint, infant

restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passenger will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassengers to have deployed air bagsreplaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

Front air bags! Make sure that there are no objects

exerting force on the front-passenger seat.This could cause the system to identify theseat as being occupied, and in the event of

42 Occupant safetySa

fety

an accident, the restraint systems on thefront-passenger side might be triggered.Have triggered restraint systems replaced.

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head andchest.They are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rate

of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending on whether the seat belt is being

usedRindependently of other air bags in the

vehicleIf the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed.Front-passenger air bag ; is only activatedif the system determines that the front-passenger seat is occupied. The 4PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp onthe center console does not light up(Y page 53).

If a child restraint system is installed on thefront-passenger seat and the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF 4 indicator lamp on thecenter console is not on:Ra child restraint system without a

transponder for the air bag deactivationsystem is installed orRa child restraint system with a transponder

has not been installed properly.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The air bag control unit evaluatesvehicle deceleration or acceleration in theevent of a collision. In the first deploymentstage, the front air bag is filled with part of thetotal available propellant gas, therebyreducing the risk of injury. If the air bagcontrol unit recognizes within a fewmilliseconds that the vehicle is being brakedor accelerated faster than originallypredicted, the front air bag is filled with themaximum amount of propellant gas available.The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center

console is not lit (Y page 53)Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high

impact severity

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty

Z

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag : deploys under thesteering column. The driver's knee bag isalways deployed along with the driver's frontair bag. The driver's knee bag is designed tooperate together with the front air bags infrontal impacts if certain thresholds areexceeded. The driver's knee bag operatesbest in conjunction with correctly positionedand fastened seat belts.Driver's knee bag : increases the driver'sprotection against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using other seat covers mayinterfere with or prevent the deployment ofthe side impact air bags. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center foravailability.

G WARNINGThe pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do notmodify any components of the doors or doortrim panels including, for example, theaddition of door speakers.Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to the

doors create a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Front side impact air bags : and rear sideimpact air bags ; deploy next to the outerseat cushions.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection of the thorax foroccupants on the front seats as well as alsoof the pelvis for the vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs. However, they do not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. Side impactair bags are deployed if the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction and determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offer

44 Occupant safetySa

fety

additional protection to that provided by theseat belt.Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in thefollowing situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passenger

seat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not

fastened.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags : enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.Window curtain air bags : are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployedin the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.Window curtain air bags are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRon the side on which an impact occurs

Ron the driver's side and passenger side, inthe event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystem determines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRregardless of whether the front-passenger

seat is occupiedRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags : will not deploy inthe event of impacts which do not exceed thesystem's preset deployment thresholds forvehicle acceleration/deceleration. You willthen be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Seat belts

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAlways fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure all of your passengers areproperly restrained. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearingyour seat belt. The air bags can only protectas intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

G WARNINGNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide under

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty

Z

it, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G WARNINGNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WARNINGAlways have damaged seat belts or seat beltsthat have been subjected to a load in anaccident replaced and the anchorageschecked.Only use seat belts that have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Never tamper with seat belts. This can resultin the unintended deployment of theEmergency Tensioning Devices or the failureto deploy when necessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this mayseverely weaken them. In the event of acollision, they may be unable to provideadequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop.

The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 50) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

Proper use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, window curtain air bags forthe side windows), Emergency TensioningDevices, seat belt force limiters, and frontseat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, window curtain airbags, and ETDs) impacts which exceedpreset deployment thresholds and incertain rollovers (window curtain air bagsand ETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should not

46 Occupant safetySa

fety

touch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm. Forthis purpose, you can adjust the height ofthe seat belt outlet.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted

snugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use a

lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty

Z

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 86).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide :.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the

appropriate height (Y page 48).X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder

section of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

Information on releasing the seat belt withrelease button ?(Y page 48).

Belt height adjustment

You can adjust the seat belt height on thefront seats. Adjust the belt to a height thatallows the upper part of the seat belt to berouted across the center of your shoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.

The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease :.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Release belt sash guide release : and

make sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Using the seat belt for the center rear-compartment seatIf the left-hand rear seat backrest is foldeddown and back up again, the rear center seatbelt may lock. The seat belt can then not bepulled out.X To release the rear center seat belt: pull

the seat belt out approximately 1 in(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrestand then release it again.The seat belt is retracted and released.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled

up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.X Guide belt tongue ; back to belt sash

guide :.

48 Occupant safetySa

fety

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out if the driver andthe front passenger have already fastenedtheir seat belts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftera maximum of six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up:Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat

belt is fastenedRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is

exceeded, a warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or front-passenger seat belt has been fastened.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the 7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passenger

have fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belts" (Y page 224).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiters

G WARNINGPyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

The front seat belts and the outer seat beltsin the rear are equipped with EmergencyTensioning Devices and seat belt forcelimiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe restraint systems are operational; see

"SRS warning lamp" 6(Y page 39).Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on

each of the front seat belts.The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end

collision, the vehicle decelerates or

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty

Z

accelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRif, in the event of a side impact, on the side

opposite the impact the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral directionRif, in certain situations where the vehicle

rolls over, the system determines that itcan provide additional protection

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.If the seat belt is also equipped with a seatbelt force limiter and this is triggered, theforce exerted by the seat belt on the vehicleoccupant is reduced.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which take on a part of the deceleration force.This results in the force exerted on theoccupant being distributed over a greaterarea.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.

The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical

12-month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the front

50 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

passenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 5 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the4 5 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint from

becoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Children in the vehicle 51

Safe

ty

Z

Further information on secure stowage ofloads can be found under "Loadingguidelines".If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:RSecure the child with a child or infant seat

restraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.RMake sure that the infant or child is

properly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children witha child or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and children must always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systems must meetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior or on the infant or child restraint.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger air bag is not disabled:Ra child secured in a child restraint system

on the front-passenger seat could beseriously or even fatally injured by the front-passenger air bag deploying. This isespecially a risk if the child is in theimmediate vicinity of the front-passengerair bag when it deploys.Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger

seat in a rearward-facing child restraintsystem. Only secure a rearward-facingchild restraint system on a suitable rearseat.Ralways move the front-passenger seat to

the rearmost position if you secure a childin a forward-facing child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat.

The front-passenger air bag is not disabled:Ron vehicles without an air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat.Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat, unlessa child restraint system with transpondersfor an air bag deactivation system isinstalled on the front-passenger seatRon vehicles with an air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat, if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp4 is not lit.

To make you aware of this danger, acorresponding warning sticker has beenaffixed on the dashboard and on both sides ofthe sun visor on the front-passenger side.Information about recommended childrestraint systems is available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

52 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor

Warning symbol for a rearward-facing childrestraint system

Do not use a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on a seat that is protected by an airbag installed in front of it.

Air bag deactivation system on thefront-passenger seat

G WARNINGIf the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp does not light up when thechild restraint system is installed, the front-passenger air bag has not been disabled. Ifthe front-passenger air bag deploys, the childcould be seriously or even fatally injured.Proceed as follows:Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat.Rinstall a rearward-facing child restraint

system on a suitable rear seat.or

Ronly use a forward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat andmove the front-passenger seat to therearmost position.Rhave the air bag deactivation system

checked at a qualified specialist workshop.To ensure that the air bag deactivation systemon the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place objects,e.g. a cushion, under the child restraintsystem. The entire base of the child restraintsystem must always rest on the seat cushion.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcannot perform its intended protectivefunction in the event of an accident, and couldlead to injuries.

G WARNINGDo not place electronic devices on the front-passenger seat, e.g.:Rlaptops, when switched onRmobile phonesRcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or

access cardsSignals from electronic equipment can causeinterference in the sensor system of the airbag deactivation system. This can lead to asystem malfunction. This may cause the4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp to light up even if no child seat with atransponder for an air bag deactivationsystem is installed. The front-passenger airbag would not then deploy during an accident.It is also possible that the 6 SRS warninglamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light upbriefly when you turn the key in the ignitionlock to position 2.

Children in the vehicle 53

Safe

ty

Z

If the front-passenger seat of your vehicledoes not have an air bag deactivation system,this is indicated by a special sticker. Thesticker is affixed to the side of the dashboardon the front-passenger side. The sticker isvisible when you open the front-passengerdoor.Vehicles without an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat: if youturn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock, the 45 indicator lamp lights upbriefly but has no function. It does notindicate that there is an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat.

The sensor system for the air bag deactivationsystem detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for the airbag deactivation system has been installed.In this case, 45 indicator lamp :lights up. The front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated:

i If the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled by the air bag deactivationsystem, the following remain enabled onthe front-passenger side:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Device

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGChildren that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck.A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea normal shoulder/lap belt fit properlywithout a booster.Install the child seat according tomanufacturer's instructions.The child seat must be firmly attached to bothanchors.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcould come loose during an accident andseriously or even fatally injure the child.Damaged or impact damaged child seats orchild seat mountings must be replaced.

! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt for the center seat does not gettrapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could bedamaged.

54 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system. Comply with themanufacturer's instructions wheninstalling the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardizedsecuring system for specially designed childrestraint systems on the rear seats. Securingrings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright of the rear seats.Secure child restraint systems without aLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securingsystem using the seat belts in the vehicle.When installing child restraint systems, youmust observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Top Tether

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the red display is visible when the rear seatbackrest is upright, it means the rear seatbackrest is not engaged correctly.Always engage the rear seat backrests in anupright position if there are passengers in therear compartment. Engage the rear seatbackrests in an upright position after you haveinstalled the Top Tether belt or if the extendedcargo compartment is not being used. Pushand pull the rear seat backrests to checkwhether they are engaged correctly. The rearseat backrest may fold down if it is notengaged correctly. The child restraint system

is then no longer supported correctly or heldin position and can no longer perform itsintended function. This can cause serious oreven fatal injuries.

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the riskof injury even further.The Top Tether anchorage points are installedon the rear side of the rear seat backrests.X Move head restraint : upwards.X Release rear seat backrest = and fold it

forwards (Y page 240).X Route Top Tether belt B under head

restraint : between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether beltB into Top Tether anchorage ?.

Children in the vehicle 55

Safe

ty

Z

Make sure that:RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top

Tether anchorage ? as shown.RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear

seat backrest = and cargocompartment cover ; if cargocompartment cover ; is installed.

X Swing back rear seat backrest = until itengages.The red lock verification indicator is nolonger visible.

X Move head restraint : back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 90). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether belt B.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so. Make sure thatTop Tether belt B is tight.

56 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

Problems with the air bag deactivation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 45indicator lamp on thecenter console is lit.

A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with atransponder for air bag deactivation system has been installed tothe front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag hastherefore been disabled as desired.

G WARNINGThere is no child restraint system installed on the front-passengerseat. The air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning.It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the 45 indicator lamp does not light up briefly when youswitch the ignition on.There is a risk of injury.X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,

for example:RLaptopRMobile phoneRCards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards

If the 45 indicator lamp remains lit:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGActivate the child-proof locks for the reardoors and the override switch for the rearwindows when children are travelling in thevehicle. Otherwise, the children could opendoors or side windows while the vehicle is inmotion and injure themselves or others.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,

Children in the vehicle 57

Safe

ty

Z

such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You can secure each door individually withthe child-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof lock

lever up in the direction of arrow :.X Make sure that the child-proof locks are

working properly.X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock

lever down in the direction of arrow ;.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

X To activate/deactivate: press button :.If indicator lamp is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If the indicator lamp is off, operationis possible using the switches in the rearcompartment.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Y page 64)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 59)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (adaptive

Brake Assist and distance warning signal)(Y page 60)RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 62)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

(Y page 62)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

(Y page 64)

58 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 64)(Y page 64)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 64)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aidsdesigned to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road, weather and trafficconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Pay particular attentionto the information regarding tires,recommended minimum tire tread depthsetc. in the "Wheels and tires" section(Y page 298).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section for driving safety systems(Y page 59).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systems

are deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 225) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 201).ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery roads,even if you only brake gently.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 59).

Driving safety systems 59

Safe

ty

Z

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists ofthe Adaptive Brake Assist and the distancewarning function, which are described in thefollowing.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section for driving safety systems(Y page 59).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

The distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.

In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningAlways pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and do not rely solely on thedistance warning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or

deactivate the distance warning function inthe on-board computer (Y page 195).

If the distance warning function is activated,the Ä symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay unless the HOLD function is active(Y page 168).On vehicles with Active Parking Assist, theÄ symbol is displayed when P is engagedor you are driving faster than 22 mph(35 km/h).The distance warning function can help youto minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision. If the distance warningfunction detects that there is a risk of acollision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. The distance warning functioncannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.Starting at a speed of around 20 mph(30 km/h), this function warns you if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe · distance warning lamp will light upin the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to do

so.For the distance warning function to assistyou when driving, the function must beactivated in the on-board computer and beoperational (Y page 195).

60 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated driving conditions may cause thesystem to display unnecessary warnings.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detectobstacles that are in the path of your vehiclefor an extended period of time.At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function may also detectstationary obstacles, for example stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for

example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicleFollowing damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assisti Observe the "Important safety notes"

section for driving safety systems(Y page 59).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficsituations. In these cases, Adaptive BrakeAssist may not intervene. There is a risk of anaccident.

Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

Adaptive Brake Assist provides brakingassistance in hazardous situations at speedsgreater than 20 mph (30 km/h) and usesradar sensor technology to assess the trafficsituation.With the help of a sensor system, adaptiveBrake Assist can detect obstacles that are inthe path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.Should you approach an obstacle andAdaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk ofcollision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a rear-endcollision. Should you apply the brakesvigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist willautomatically increase the braking force to alevel suitable for the traffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the

emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end

collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your

vehicle.Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Driving safety systems 61

Safe

ty

Z

Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been recognized as such at least onceover the period of observation. AdaptiveBrake Assist does not react to stationaryobstacles.If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available dueto a malfunction in the radar sensor system,the brake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for

example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicleFollowing damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive brake lightsIf you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BASor Adaptive Brake Assist, the brake lampsflash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelingbehind you is warned in an even morenoticeable manner.If you brake sharply to a standstill from aspeed of more than 70 km/h, the hazardwarning lamps are activated automatically. Ifthe brakes are applied again, the brake lampslight up continuously. The hazard warninglamps switch off automatically if you travelfaster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off

the hazard warning lamps using the hazardwarning button (Y page 101).

i Adaptive brake lamps are only available incertain countries.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 59).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®

can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"

section for driving safety systems(Y page 59).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually ifthey spin. This enables you to pull away andaccelerate on slippery surfaces, for exampleif the road surface is slippery on one side.ETS remains active when you deactivateESP®.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

62 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

! When testing the electric parking brakeon a braking dynamometer, switch off theignition. Application of the brakes byESP® may otherwise destroy the brakesystem.

When towing your vehicle with the front axleraised, observe the notes onESP®(Y page 293).ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFFwarning lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup continuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and theå ESP® OFF warning lamp are litcontinuously, ESP® is not available due to amalfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 227) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 201).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any

circumstances.X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far

as necessary when pulling away.X Adapt your driving style to suit the

prevailing road and weather conditions.

Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section for driving safety systems(Y page 59).

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer.X To deactivate:(Y page 194).

The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate:(Y page 194).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Driving safety systems 63

Safe

ty

Z

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and

the drive wheels are able to spin. Thespinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction, which provides better grip.RETS is still active.RESP® still provides support when you

brake.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

i Observe the "Important safety notes"section for driving safety systems(Y page 59).

G WARNINGIf EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 225) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 203).EBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 168) and hill start assist

(Y page 136). For further information, seeDriving tips (Y page 154).

STEER CONTROLSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided inparticular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on

a wet or slippery road surface when youbrakeRthe vehicle starts to skidIf ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receivesteering support from STEER CONTROL.Power steering will, however, continue tofunction.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate: remove the SmartKey from

the ignition lock.X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

64 Theft deterrent locking systemSa

fety

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with theSmartKey.Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Rthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRa doorRthe tailgateRthe hoodX To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKey

into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the % or & button on the

SmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates acall to the Customer Assistance Centerautomatically. The Tele Aid system willinitiate the call provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid

service.Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated

properly.Rthe necessary mobile phone, power

supply and GPS coverage are available.

Theft deterrent locking system 65

Safe

ty

Z

66

Useful information .............................. 68SmartKey ............................................. 68Doors .................................................... 73Cargo compartment ............................ 75Side windows ...................................... 77Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ........................................ 80

67

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could beunintentionally turned in the ignition lock. Thiscould cause the engine to be switched off.There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe SmartKey. Remove any bulky key ringsbefore inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile

phone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal

foilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button ;.

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed

again.

68 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X To lock centrally: press button :.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe tailgateRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.

i When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 198).

i You can also set an audible signal toconfirm that the vehicle has been locked.The audible signal can be activated anddeactivated using the on-board computer(Y page 199).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystem

You can change the settings of the lockingsystem. When you then unlock the vehicleonly the driver's door and the fuel filler flapare unlocked. This is useful if you frequentlytravel on your own.X To change the setting: press and hold

down the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lamp(Y page 70) flashes twice.

i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the %button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the & button.X To restore the factory settings: press

and hold down the % and & buttons

simultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice (Y page 70).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 65).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X Press the % or & button on the

SmartKey.orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch : in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key ; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey 69

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosivesubstances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the & or % button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp : lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp : does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 70).

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 69).

X Press mechanical key ; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery tray cover : opens.When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.

X Remove battery tray cover :.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery = falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

70 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of battery traycover : and then press to close it.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 71

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control

function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the % or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary

(Y page 70).X Unlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control

function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the % /& button.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

72 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary

(Y page 285).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 289).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The steering lock is mechanically blocked.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While

doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside

X To unlock a front door: pull doorhandle ;.Locking knob : pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

Doors 73

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

X To open a front door: pull doorhandle ;.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob :.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can open therear doors from inside the vehicle unless theyare secured by the child-proof lock(Y page 58).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This can be useful if you wishto lock the vehicle before pulling away, forexample.

X To unlock: press button :.X To lock: press button ;.

The vehicle locks when all the doors andthe tailgate are closed.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can open therear doors from inside the vehicle unless theyare secured by the child-proof lock(Y page 58).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).If the vehicle has been locked using thelocking button for the central locking, or hasbeen locked automatically, and a door isopened from the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had

previously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened form

the inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button :for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button ; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.

74 DoorsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 198).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 65).X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 69).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwiseto position 1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.

X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the rear

doors and the tailgate.X Press the locking button (Y page 74).X Check whether the locking knobs on the

front-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs manually, if necessary (Y page 73).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 69).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position 1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgateare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running,

Cargo compartment 75

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening thetailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i The opening dimensions of the tailgatecan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 335).

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe theloading guidelines (Y page 236).Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargocompartment. You could otherwise lockyourself out.The tailgate can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRunlocked from inside with the mechanical

key

Opening/closing from outside

OpeningX Press the % button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle :.X Raise the tailgate.

Closing

X Pull the tailgate down using handle :.X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the& button on the SmartKey.

Tailgate emergency releaseIf the tailgate can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the tailgate.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i The opening dimensions of the tailgatecan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 335).

76 Cargo compartmentOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

You can reach the emergency release via thecargo compartment. Fold the rear backrestsforward (Y page 240).X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 69).

X Insert mechanical key ; into the openingin paneling :.

X Turn mechanical key ; 90° clockwise.X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of

the arrow and open the tailgate.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch to open the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock thevehicle. Never leave children unsupervised inthe vehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small

fingersRover the last 4 mm of the closing movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again

manually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the sidewindows

The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

Side windows 77

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 58), the sidewindows cannot be operated from the rear.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To open fully: press the corresponding

switch beyond the point of resistance.Automatic closing is started.

X To close: pull the corresponding switch.X To close fully: pull the corresponding

switch beyond the pressure point.Automatic closing is started.

X To interrupt the automatic opening/closing: press/pull the correspondingswitch again.

i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Convenience openingYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functionssimultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel and the roller sunblinds

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the % button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are in the desiredposition.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the % button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the % button.

Convenience closing feature

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature isoperating, parts of the body could becometrapped in the closing area of the side windowand the sliding sunroof. There is a risk ofinjury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature isoperating. Make sure that no body parts arein close proximity during the closingprocedure.

78 Side windowsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

When you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panelOn vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

i The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the & button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the & button again until

the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the & button.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if:Rthe side window opens again slightly after

being closed fully.Rthe side window can no longer be fully

opened or closed.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Pull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 77).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch

on the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 77).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remains

closed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediatelyafter it has been blocked or reset, the sidewindow closes with increased or maximumforce. The reversing feature is then not active.Parts of the body could be trapped in theclosing area in the process. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area. To stop the closing process,release the switch or push the switch again toreopen the side window.

Problem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If a sidewindow is obstructed during closing andreopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed with increasedforce.

Side windows 79

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closingprocedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closed when you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicleinterior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small

fingersRover the last 4 mm of the closing movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof again

manually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

80 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Operating the sliding sunroof

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Make sure that the roller sunblinds are

open.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the

corresponding direction.i If you press the 3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.The automatic raising feature is availableonly when the sliding sunroof is closed.

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped between

the roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thesliding sunroof is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a roller sunblind during theclosing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small

fingersRwhen closing the roller sunblind again

manually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 81

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the

corresponding direction.i If you press the 3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblindsIf the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblindsdo not move smoothly, reset the slidingsunroof and the roller sunblinds:X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the 3 switch to the point of

resistance in the direction of arrow ; andhold it until the sliding sunroof has openedabout 4 in (10 cm).

X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow =until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the 3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Press the 3 switch to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow ; andhold it until the roller sunblinds are openabout 4 in (10 cm).

X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow =until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the 3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof(Y page 81) and the roller sunblinds(Y page 82) can be fully opened and closedagain.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you do not reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption,then the backing up function will malfunctionor not work. The sliding sunroof closes withincreased or maximum force. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area inthe process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.In such or similar situations always make surethat no parts of the body are in the closingarea. Always reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of amalfunction, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If the slidingsunroof is obstructed during closing andreopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3

switch down again to the point of

82 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

resistance until the sliding sunroof isclosedThe sliding sunroof is closed with increasedforce.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed againduring closing and then reopens slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3

switch down again to the point ofresistance until the sliding sunroof isclosedThe sliding sunroof is closed without theanti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 83

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

84

Useful information .............................. 86Correct driver's seat position ............ 86Seats .................................................... 87Steering wheel .................................... 91Mirrors ................................................. 92Memory functions ............................... 95

85

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Correct driver's seat position

Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 87).X Make sure that seat = is adjusted

properly.Manual seat adjustment (Y page 88)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 88)When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air

bag as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright

position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so

that your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

X Check whether the head restraint isadjusted properly (Y page 89).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 91).X Make sure that steering wheel : is

adjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel(Y page 91)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the

instrument cluster clearly.Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 45).X Check whether you have fastened seat

belt ; properly (Y page 47).The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your

shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the

hip jointsX Before starting off, adjust the rear-view

mirror and the exterior mirrors(Y page 92) in such a way that you havea good view of road and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat and exterior mirror settings(Y page 95).

86 Correct driver's seat positionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seatadjustment buttons and become trapped.There is a risk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get underthe lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsystem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the event

of an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seat

Seats 87

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

heating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the

seats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front and rearseats can be removed.1

For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RLuggage compartment enlargement

(folding down the rear seats)(Y page 240)

Adjusting the seats manually

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards

or backwards.X Release lever : again.

Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Backrest angleX Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.

Seat heightX Pull handle = upwards or push it down

repeatedly until the seat has reached thedesired height.

Seat cushion angleAdjust the angle so that your thighs are lightlysupported.X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height2

; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

1 Not on vehicles with sports seats.2 Not available on vehicles with sports seats.

88 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 95).

Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch : in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of thehead restraint

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint

forwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages.There are several notches.

X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button : and push the headrestraint backwards.

X When the head restraint is in the desiredposition, release the button and make surethat the head restraint is engaged inposition.

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slide

the switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 88) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Seats 89

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch : and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraintsG WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

The rear head restraints on the outer seatscan be removed and re-installed.

X Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards inorder to remove the head restraint(Y page 240).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch : and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

90 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively hightemperatures may be affected or they mayeven suffer burn-like injuries. There is a riskof injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched offprematurely or cannot be switched on. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do

not need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

Steering wheel 91

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever : down completely.

The steering column is unlocked.X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.X Push release lever : up completely.

The steering column is locked.X Check if the steering column is locked.

When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge thedistance from road users traveling behind,e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of anaccident.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button : for the left-hand exteriormirror or button ; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button = as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button = up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjustedthe exterior mirror to the correct position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear window

92 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

defroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button :.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer foldin the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 199).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 1 in the ignition lock.X Briefly press button :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 199):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again

automatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding

exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button (Y page 93) until you hear aclick and then the mirrors engage inposition.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 92).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function isonly available if the vehicle is equipped withthe "Mirrors package".The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the

sensor in the rear-view mirror.The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or the interior lightingis switched on.

Mirrors 93

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

General notesThe "Parking position of the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side" function is onlyavailable if the vehicle is equipped with the"Mirrors package".

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gearYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition. This setting can be stored usingmemory button M ?.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

X Press memory button M ? and one of thearrows on adjustment button = withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsettingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side with the correspondingbutton (Y page 92).

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have

disengaged reverse gearRif you press button : for the exterior

mirror on the driver's side

94 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Memory functions

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use the memory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seat,you and other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the memory function is makingadjustments, make sure that no one has anybody parts in the sweep of the seat. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, immediatelyrelease the memory function position button.The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if theyactivate the memory function, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and head

restraintRdriver's side: position of the exterior

mirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 88).X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's

side (Y page 92).X Briefly press the M memory button and

then press storage position button 1, 2 or3 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage

position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat andexterior mirrors are in the stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

Memory functions 95

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

96

Useful information .............................. 98Exterior lighting .................................. 98Interior lighting ................................. 103Replacing bulbs ................................. 104Windshield wipers ............................ 111

97

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 100)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 197)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampCN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog

lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to Ã.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey

in position 0.

98 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:

the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have

activated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã.

The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in high ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, you turn on thedaytime running lamps and parking lamps.

If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect thatit is dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improvevisibility as well as making it easier for otherroad users to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or togetherwith the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps.X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn

the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the N button.

The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps areequipped with the "fog lamp" function;information on the fog lamp function forvehicles with Intelligent Light System(Y page 102).

Exterior lighting 99

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively

discharged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The green T indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: the

SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow ; or ?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction ofarrow :.In the à position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.

100 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,it controls activation of the high-beamheadlamps (Y page 102).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the

ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployedRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a

speed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,

only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :.

The hazard warning lamps switch offautomatically if the vehicle reaches a speedof over 6mph (10km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated five times while the lights are on andthe engine is running (Y page 111). When youswitch off the ignition, the automaticheadlamp cleaning system is reset andcounting is resumed from 0.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. Thecornering light function can only be activatedwhen the low-beam headlamps are switchedon.

Exterior lighting 101

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph

(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheel.Rif you are driving at speeds between

25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel.

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Extended range fog lamps

The extended range fog lamps reduce theglare experienced by the driver and improvethe illumination of the edge of the road.Active: if you are driving at speeds below40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rearfog lamp.Not active: if, following activation, you aredriving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h)or if you switch off the rear fog lamp.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late.In this or similar situations, the automatichigh-beam headlamps will not be deactivatedor activated regardless. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

You can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on thedistance to the other vehicle. Once thesystem no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

102 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X To activate: activate the AdaptiveHighbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 197).

X Turn the light switch to Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :(Y page 100).The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up if it is darkand the light sensor activates the low-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 28 mph (45 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and noother road users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds belowapproximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or otherroad users have been detected or the roadsare adequately lit:

The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the lights and drive off.The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting

on= v To switch the on/off

Interior lighting 103

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

? | To switch the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off

A p To switch the right-hand frontreading lamp on/off

B To switch the automatic interior lightingcontrol on

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: To switch the reading lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

Important notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The brightness of the ambient lighting may beset using the on-board computer(Y page 197).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: set the switch to center

position B.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 198).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on:

set the switch to the c position.X To switch the interior lighting off: set the

switch to the | position or (if the dooris closed) to the center position.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsive

emergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the

key.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electricalcontacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electricalcontacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have workon the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

104 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 105). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Halogen headlamps: Turn signal lamp:3457; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W LL? Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Replacing bulbs 105

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Tail lamp (halogen headlamps): Tail lamp/turn signal lamp/brake lamp:

P 21 W; Inoperative= Side marker lamp: P 21 W? Rear fog lamp: P 21 WA Backup lamp: W 16 W

Tail lamp (Bi-Xenon headlamps): Turn signal lamp/brake lamp: P 21 W; Rear fog lamp: H 21 W= Backup lamp: W 16 W

License plate lamp (vehicles with halogenheadlamps): License plate lamp: C 5 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housingYou must remove the cover from the frontwheel housing before you can change thefront bulbs.

X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.

Cover ; is released.X Push cover ; down.X To install: push cover ; up.X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.

Cover ; is locked.

106 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Low-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurized.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. Ifnecessary, have bulbs changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Remove the cover in the front wheelhousing (Y page 106).

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.X Replace the cover in the front wheel

housing (Y page 106).

High-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurized.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. Ifnecessary, have bulbs changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and

pull it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

Replacing bulbs 107

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Parking lamps/standing lamps(halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Pull out bulb holder ;.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ;.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and

pull it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise

until it engages.

Cornering light function (IntelligentLight System)

G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurized.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. Ifnecessary, have bulbs changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and

pull it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

108 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trimpanelsYou must open the side trim panel in thecargo compartment before you can changethe bulbs in the tail lamps.

Left-hand side trim panel

Right-hand side trim panelX To open: turn release knob : 90° in the

direction of the arrow and remove side trimpanel ;.

X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turnrelease knob : 90° in the oppositedirection to the arrow.

Tail lamps

Turn signal lamp/tail lamp and brakelampX Switch off the lights.X Open the cargo compartment.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 109).

X Press retaining lugs : simultaneously inthe direction of the arrow and pull the bulbholder out.

Bulb holder: Tail lamp/brake lamp3

; Inoperative lamps (vehicles without LEDs)= Side marker lamp (vehicles without LEDs)X Lightly press the corresponding bulb into

the holder, turn it counter-clockwise andremove it from the bulb holder.

X Insert the corresponding new bulb into thebulb holder and turn it clockwise.

3 Vehicles with LEDs: turn signal/brake light only.

Replacing bulbs 109

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X Attach the bulb holder and press firmly.The retaining lugs on the bulb holderengage audibly.

X Close the side trim panel (Y page 109).

Backup lamp and rear fog lampDue to their location, have the bulbs in thebackup lamp and rear fog lamp in the tailgatechanged at a qualified specialist workshop.X Switch off the lights.X Open the tailgate.

X In recess ? on the inside of the closinghandle, pry off and remove the uppersection of handle = with a flat and smoothobject, e.g. a screwdriver.

X Pull the lower section of handle : using asharp, sudden movement to remove it fromthe trim and then place it to one side.

X Reach under the right-hand side of trimB and apply a gentle jolting force along theentire length of the trim in order to unclipit.

X Pull out connector C of the surroundlighting by releasing the latches.

X Place trim B to one side.

X On the side where the bulb is to bechanged, unclip the remaining part of trimD from the assembly using a sudden,sharp movements, until bulb holder E isaccessible.

X Remove bulb holder E using both sides oflever F.

110 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Bulb holderX Rear fog lamp G: lightly press the

corresponding bulb into holder E, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from bulbholder E.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E andturn it clockwise.

X Backup lamp H: remove the bulb frombulb holder E.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E.X Re-insert bulb holder E until you hear

engage audibly.X Position trim D and engage it in place by

tapping it with your hand.X Before beginning the installation, check

that all the metal clips are inserted in theparts placed to one side: 2 clips ; in theupper part of handle = and 5 clips A intrim B.

X If not, remove the missing metal clips fromthe metal openings in the tailgate andinsert them in the appropriate places.

X Take trim B and connect plug connectorC to the surround lighting.

i The surround lighting only illuminateswhen the tailgate has been shut andreopened.

X Position trim B and engage it in place bytapping it with your hand, starting from theoutside.

X Clip in the lower section of handle : again.X Insert and engage the upper section of

handle = into lower section :.

License plate lamp

X Switch off the lights.X Open the tailgate.X Position a screwdriver on lamp lens :

from the outside.X Lever out lamp lens : and remove it.X Replace the bulb.X Insert lamp lens : into the license plate

lamp and press it in until it engages.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes place whenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating thewindshield wipers.

Windshield wipers 111

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the

corresponding position.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if thewindshield becomes dirty in dry weatherconditions, the windshield wipers may beactivated inadvertently. This could thendamage the windshield wiper blades orscratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriate wipingfrequency is automatically set according tothe intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than in

the Ä position, causing the windshieldwipers to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the trafficconditions. Replace the wiper blades twice ayear, ideally in spring and fall.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Switch2 ô To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Turn switch : on the combination switch

to the corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a riskof injury.

112 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield/rear window.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe wiper arm without a wiper blade and itfalls onto the windshield/rear window, thewindshield/rear window may be damagedby the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.X Fold the wiper arm away from the

windshield.

X Press both release clips ;.X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of

arrow = away from wiper arm ?.X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of

arrow A.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade : withrecess B on lug A.

X Fold wiper blade : in the direction ofarrow = onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips ; engage in bracket ?.

X Make sure that wiper blade : is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rearwindow until it engages.

X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle towiper arm :.

Windshield wipers 113

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X Hold wiper arm : and press wiperblade ; in the direction of the arrow untilit releases.

X Remove wiper blade ;.

Installing a wiper bladeX Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper

arm :.X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper

blade ; in the opposite direction to thearrow until it engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seatedcorrectly.

X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiperarm :.

X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rearwindow.

114 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the

ignition lock.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The spray nozzles aremisaligned.

The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hitsthe center of the windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Windshield wipers 115

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

116

Useful information ............................ 118Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 118Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 123Setting the air vents ......................... 130

117

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only

brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air

dehumidification functionRswitch on the defrost windshield function

briefly, if requiredThe automatic climate control regulates thetemperature and the humidity of the vehicleinterior and filters out undesirablesubstances from the air.Automatic climate control/dual-zoneautomatic climate control is only operationalwhen the engine is running. Optimumoperation is only achieved with the sidewindows and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed.The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 129).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 78).

This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the MaintenanceBooklet.

i It is possible that the dehumidificationfunction of the climate control system maybe activated automatically an hour after theSmartKey has been removed. The vehicleis then ventilated for 30 minutes.

118 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Control panel for automatic climate control

USA only: To set the temperature (Y page 125); To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)= To set the air distribution (Y page 126)? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)A To set the airflow (Y page 126)B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)

Canada only: To set the temperature (Y page 125); To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)= To set the air distribution (Y page 126)

Overview of climate control systems 119

Clim

ate

cont

rol

? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)A To set the airflow (Y page 126)B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)

Notes on using automatic climatecontrol

Automatic climate controlThe following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use of theautomatic climate control.RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by

turning control knob A clockwise to thedesired position (except position 0).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).RRecommendation for preventing

fogged up windows with low outside temperatures or rain: switch ¯ on forthe air distribution and switch P andO off if possible (Y page 126).In air-recirculation mode, switch d off(Y page 129).Set airflow control A to a setting between3 and 6(Y page 126).RRecommendation for rapid cooling or

heating of the vehicle interior: briefly setairflow control A to a setting between 3and 6(Y page 126).RRecommendation for a constant

vehicle interior temperature: set airflowcontrol A to a setting between 1 and3(Y page 126).RRecommendation for air distribution in

the winter: set O and¯(Y page 126).Recommendation for air distribution in the summer: set P or P and¯(Y page 126).ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"

function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RIf you change the settings of the climate

control system, the climate status displayappears for three seconds at the bottom ofthe screen in the COMAND display. Seealso the separate COMAND operatinginstructions4. You will see the currentsettings of the various climate controlfunctions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 138).

4 Only for vehicles with "COMAND Multimedia System" optional equipment

120 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 125); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 125)= To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)? To increase the airflow (Y page 126)A To set the air distribution (Y page 126)B DisplayC To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 123)E To set the temperature, right (Y page 125)F To activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 127)G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)H To reduce the airflow (Y page 126)I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 126)

Overview of climate control systems 121

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 125); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 125)= To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)? To increase the airflow (Y page 126)A To set the air distribution (Y page 126)B DisplayC To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 123)E To set the temperature, right (Y page 125)F To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 129)G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)H To reduce the airflow (Y page 126)I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 126)

Notes on using dual-zone automaticclimate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using the à and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and ¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the

temperature settings on the driver's side

122 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

for the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp in the á button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you want

to heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. Theresidual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switchedoff.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 138).

Operating the climate controlsystems

Switching climate control on/off

Points to observe before useWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

Activating/deactivating

Automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to

the desired position (except position 0)(Y page 119).

X To switch off: turn control A counter-clockwise to position 0(Y page 119).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To activate: press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the à button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ̂ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the ^ button.The indicator lamp in the ̂ button lightsup.

i Dual-zone automatic climate control:switch on climate control primarily usingthe à button.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

Points to observe before useIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.The cooling with air dehumidification functionis only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.

Operating the climate control systems 123

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the ¿ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

124 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe ¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The"Cooling with airdehumidification"function cannot beswitched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting the climate control toautomatic

The automatic function is only available inconjunction with dual-zone automatic climatecontrol.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the à button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press theÉ or Ë button.

orX Press the K or I button.

The indicator lamp in the à button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Setting the temperature

Automatic climate controlYou can set the temperature for the entirevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To increase/reduce: turn control :

clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 119). Only change the temperaturesetting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To increase/reduce: turn control : orE clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 121). Only change the temperature

Operating the climate control systems 125

Clim

ate

cont

rol

setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Automatic climate control

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

vents

i You can also activate several airdistribution settings simultaneously. To dothis, press multiple air distribution buttons.The air is then directed through variousvents.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X Press one or more of the P, O,¯ buttons.The corresponding indicator lamp lights upbriefly.

Dual-zone automatic climate control

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsb Directs air through the defroster,

center and side air ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed if the adjusters are turned clockwiseuntil they engage.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly

until the desired symbol appears in thedisplay.

Setting the airflow

Automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To increase/reduce: turn control A

clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 119).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To increase/reduce: press the K orI button.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available with dual-zoneautomatic climate control.X To activate: press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button lightsup.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside.

X To deactivate: press the á button.The indicator lamp in the á button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passengerside.

126 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.

i You should only select the "windshielddefrosting" function until the windshield isclear again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 135).

X To activate: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and

front side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

i The "windshield defrosting" functionautomatically sets the blower output to theoptimum defrosting effect. As a result, theairflow may increase or decreaseautomatically after the button is pressed.

i You can adjust the blower outputmanually while the "Windshield defrosting"function is in operation:RAutomatic climate control: turn airflow

control A clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 119).RDual-zone automatic climate control:

press the ó or ô button.X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

or

X Press the à button.5The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Automatic climate control: turn

temperature control : clockwise orcounter-clockwise (Y page 119).Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn temperature controls : or Eclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 121).

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press the Ù button.

The indicator lamp in the button lights up.X To deactivate: press the Ù button

again.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

Automatic climate controlX Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air

dehumidification" function.X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the "windshield defrosting" function(Y page 127).

5 3-zone automatic climate control only.

Operating the climate control systems 127

Clim

ate

cont

rol

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air

dehumidification" function.X Activate automatic mode Ã.X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the "windshield defrosting" function(Y page 127).

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Set the air distribution to P or O.i You should only select this setting until

the windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

Activating/deactivatingThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X Press the ¤ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lightsup or goes out.

128 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The rear windowdefroster hasdeactivatedprematurely or cannotbe activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading

lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, inparticular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent thewindows from fogging up.You can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To activate: press the e button.

The indicator lamp in the e button lightsup.

i Air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically at high outsidetemperatures. When air-recirculation modeis activated automatically, the indicatorlamp in the e button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press the e button.The indicator lamp in the e button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes at

outside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if the

"Cooling with air dehumidification"function is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at

outside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function isactivated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

The residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with dual-zone automaticclimate control.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30 minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the temperature that has beenset.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

Operating the climate control systems 129

Clim

ate

cont

rol

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it (Y page 135).

X To activate: press the Ì button.The indicator lamp in the Ì button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the Ì button.The indicator lamp in the Ì button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRwhen the auxiliary heating is activated

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the airoutlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield

and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles

in the vehicle interior.

i You can move the adjusters for the airvents vertically or horizontally to set thedirection of the airflow.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set theadjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents :counter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents :clockwise until it engages.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air ventX To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster

in side air vent ; counter-clockwise.X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster

in side air vent ; clockwise until itengages.

130 Setting the air ventsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheelX To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or

down.

Setting the air vents 131

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

132

Useful information ............................ 134Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 134Driving ............................................... 134Automatic transmission ................... 140Refueling ............................................ 147Parking ............................................... 149Driving tips ........................................ 152Driving systems ................................ 157

133

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1,000miles (1,500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying

vehicle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full

throttle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the

tachometer needle is Ô of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator

pedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),

drive in program E.

After 1,000 miles (1,500km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle up to full speed.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking-in if the engine or parts of thedrive train on your vehicle have beenreplaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.

134 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

Key positions

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

i During a cold start, the engine runs athigher speeds to enable the catalyticconverter to reach its operatingtemperature. The sound of the engine maychange during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.

Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

i When the transmission is in position N,you can also start the engine with the brakepedal depressed.

Starting procedureX Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Driving 135

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Pulling away

Automatic transmissioni It is only possible to shift the transmission

from position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then canthe parking lock be deactivated. If you donot depress the brake pedal, the DIRECTSELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock remains engaged.

i If the transmission oil temperature isbelow Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 † ), you can only shift fromposition P when the engine is running.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

The electric parking brake (Y page 150) isautomatically released.The red ! indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 198).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assist

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.

The vehicle is then held for about a second.X Pull away.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on

a downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.Further information on holding the vehiclestationary on uphill gradients (Y page 143).

ECO start/stop function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notesIf the ¤ symbol is shown in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically when the vehicle stops.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

136 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The stop/start function is automaticallyactivated each time you start the engine withthe SmartKey.If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 138) or amalfunction has caused the system to bedeactivated, the ¤ symbol is notdisplayed.

Automatic engine switch-off

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland the ¤ symbol is displayed in themultifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green.Rthe outside temperature is within the

comfort range.Rthe engine is at normal operating

temperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.If conditions for automatic engine switch-offhave not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol willnot be shown.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stoppedautomatically.

i The engine can be switched offautomatically a maximum of four times(first stop and three subsequent stops) insuccession. Automatic engine switch-off ispossible again once the ECO symbolappears in the multifunction display.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depressthe accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

General notesThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior

deviates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the

windshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too

low.Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the

driver's door is opened.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not

activated and the transmission is inposition D or N.Rdepress the accelerator pedal.Rmove the transmission out of position P.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is available

Driving 137

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

again as soon as the ¤ symbolreappears in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO buttonX To switch off: press button :.

Indicator lamp ; on button : and the¤ symbol in the multifunction display goout.

X To switch on: press button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 137) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 137) are fulfilled the¤ symbol is not shown in themultifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivatedmanually or as the result of a malfunction.The engine will then not be switched offautomatically when the vehicle stops.

138 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 167) or DISTRONIC

PLUS (Y page 159).X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before

attempting to start the engine again.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 135). Avoid excessively

long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 289).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two

minutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 139

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

The coolanttemperature display isshowing more than248 ‡ (120 †). Thecoolant warning lampmay also be lit and awarning tone maysound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant

to cool down.X Check the coolant level (Y page 269). Observe the warning

notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positionsThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The currenttransmission position P, R, N or D appearsin the transmission position display(Y page 141) in the multifunction display.

140 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Transmission position and driveprogram displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into whichtransmission positions you can changeusing the DIRECT SELECT lever.

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to check whetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should selecttransmission position D and drive programE or S.

Engaging park position PX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the

direction of arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

i When you engage park position P, makesure that the transmission position displayshows P in the multifunction display.

i You can only engage park position P whenthe vehicle is stationary.

i The automatic transmission shifts intopark position P automatically:Rif you open the driver's door while the

vehicle is stationary in transmissionposition D or RRif you open the door while traveling at

very low speeds in transmission positionD or R

In addition, a warning tone sounds and adisplay message is shown.

i Depressing the brake and pushing theDIRECT SELECT lever up or downdisengages the parking lock. Thetransmission is in N neutral.At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of parkposition P into another transmissionposition when the engine is running.In order to shift from park position Pdirectly into R or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or

down past the first point of resistance

! If the engine speed is too high or thevehicle is moving, do not shift theautomatic transmission directly from D toR, from R to D or directly to P. Theautomatic transmission could otherwise bedamaged.

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to

R when the vehicle is stationary.

i The ECO start/stop function is notavailable when reverse gear is engaged.Further information on the ECO start/stopfunction (Y page 136).

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral NX When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down

to the first point of resistance.If the engine has been switched off, theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto N.

Automatic transmission 141

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Remaining in neutral NIf the automatic transmission is to remain inneutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in carwashes with a towing device, please observethe following instructions:

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,

release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past

the first point of resistance.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P unless the vehicle isstationary (Y page 149). Theparking lock should not be used asa brake when parking. Alwaysapply the electronic parking brakein addition to the parking lock inorder to secure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the transmissionmay be locked in position P.Have the vehicle electronicschecked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission toposition N if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.When you switch off the engine, theautomatic transmissionautomatically shifts into neutral N.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

142 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 143)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

Holding the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients

G WARNINGIf the clutch overheats, the electronicmanagement system is automaticallydeactivated. This interrupts the powertransmission. The vehicle may, for example,roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk ofan accident.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.

The clutch may overheat if you hold thevehicle stationary on uphill gradients bydepressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutchoverheats, a warning tone sounds. The Stop Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine Running display message appears in themultifunction display. You will only be able tocontinue your journey once the clutch hascooled down and the display message in themultifunction display has disappeared.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationaryon uphill gradients by:Rdepressing the brake pedalRactivating the HOLD functionRengaging the electric parking brake

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengears D and R may help to free the vehicle ifit has become stuck in slush or snow. Thevehicle's engine management system limitsthe speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h)when shifting back and forth. To shift backand forth between transmission positions Dand R, move the selector lever up and downbeyond the pressure point.

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs withdifferent driving characteristics.

Example: program selector button

Automatic transmission 143

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Only change from automatic drive programE or S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Press program selector button :

repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program E each time theengine is started.

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 144).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shiftsdown)

; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shiftsup)

In drive program M, you can change gearyourself using the steering wheel paddleshifters.If you pull the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter when in automatic driveprogram E or S, the automatic transmissionshifts into drive program M for a limited time.Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled,

the automatic transmission immediatelyshifts into the next gear down or up.

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.

i For further information on the manualdrive program, see (Y page 144).

Automatic drive programDrive program E is characterized by thefollowing:Rcomfort-oriented engine settingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting from

the automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently in

forward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine settingsRthe automatic transmission shifting up

laterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Manual drive program

IntroductionIn manual drive program M, you can changegear yourself by using the steering wheelpaddle shifters. For this, the transmissionmust be in position D. The gear currently

144 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

selected and engaged is shown in themultifunction display.Manual drive program M differs from driveprograms E and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.

Gear Driving situations

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect

5 To use the braking effect of theengine on downhill gradients andfor driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Switching on the manual drive programActivating permanentlyX Press the program selector button

(Y page 143) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.Manual drive program M remains activeuntil drive program E or S is engaged.

Activating temporarilyX Pull the right or left steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 144).M is shown in the multifunction display.Manual drive program M is temporarilyactive. Depending on which paddle shifteris pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear downor up.

i When manual drive program M isactivated via the steering wheel paddleshifters, the temporarily active manualdrive program M will be deactivatedautomatically after a limited time, if thedriving situation permits. In this case, the

automatic transmission shifts into theautomatic drive program that was lastengaged, i.e. E or S. When driving ondownhill gradients, the temporarily activemanual drive program M will only bedeactivated if the accelerator pedal isdepressed while the vehicle is rollingdownhill.

UpshiftingX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 144).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbolappears in the display instead of M.

i To prevent engine damage the automatictransmission shifts up automatically:Rif the maximum engine speed on the

currently engaged gear is reached andRyou continue to accelerate.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 144).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmissionautomatically shifts down.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until thetransmission selects the optimum gear forthe current speed.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

Automatic transmission 145

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

i During kickdown, you cannot change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters.

i If you apply full throttle, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gearwhen the maximum engine speed isreached. This prevents the engine fromoverrevving.

Switching off the manual drive programX Press the program selector button

(Y page 143) repeatedly until E or Sappears in the multifunction display.

Deactivating the temporary manual drive programX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter until the automatictransmission shifts into the last activeautomatic drive program: E or S.

i If manual drive program M is deactivated,the automatic transmission in automaticdrive program E or S may shift from thecurrent gear into a higher or lower gear.This is dependent on the position of theaccelerator pedal, speed and load.

146 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger shifts into all ofthe gears.Reverse gear can nolonger be engaged.

The transmission is in emergency mode.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical

assistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. The repaircosts are high. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.

Refueling 147

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 330).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= To insert the fuel filler cap? Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayedæ in the instrument cluster. The arrow onthe filling pump indicates the side of thevehicle.

OpeningX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of

arrow :.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into holder on theinside of fuel filler flap =.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

ClosingX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly.X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the 8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. A message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 214).In addition, the ; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 231).For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 231).

148 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately

and remove it (Y page 135).X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 68).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 69).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf flammable materials such as leaves, grassor twigs are exposed to prolonged contact toparts of the exhaust system that heat up, theycould ignite. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

Parking 149

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P and

the transmission position display mustshow P.Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the

ignition lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front

wheels must be turned towards the curb.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.If you then open one of the front doors orremove the SmartKey from the ignition, theautomatic transmission shifts to P.If you shift the automatic transmission toN before switching off the engine, theautomatic transmission remains in N evenif a door is opened.

i The automatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically if you:Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey

and remove the SmartKey from theignition lock orRswitch off the engine using the SmartKey

and open a front door.If you attempt to turn off the engine when theselector lever is not in position P:Ra message appears in the multifunction

displayRa warning signal sounds

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while the

150 ParkingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

engine is switched off. The sounds that canbe heard while this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

ApplyingX Push handle :.

When the electric parking brake isengaged, the ! red indicator lamp lightsup in the instrument cluster.

i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

ReleasingX Pull handle :.

The red ! indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

i You can only release the electric parkingbrake when the key is in position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is appliedautomatically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a

standstill orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle

stationaryIn addition, at least one of the followingconditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt

is not fastened.Rthere is a system malfunction.Rthe power supply is insufficient.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy

period.The red ! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

i The electric parking brake is notautomatically engaged if the engine isswitched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

Releasing automaticallyYour vehicle's electric parking brake isautomatically released if all of the followingconditions are met:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the tailgatemust be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission

position P or you have previously drivenfaster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle : of the electric

parking brake (Y page 150).

i The vehicle is braked for as long ashandle : of the electric parking brake ispressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle : is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Park. Brake message

appearsRthe red ! indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster flashesWhen the vehicle has been braked to astandstill, the electric parking brake isengaged.

Parking 151

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and

seek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communicationequipment while driving, you will bedistracted from traffic conditions. You couldalso lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are driving. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile phone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you are

unsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)per second.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:RThe tires should always be inflated to the

recommended tire pressure.RRemove unnecessary loads.RRemove roof racks when they are not

needed.RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.RHave all maintenance work carried out as

indicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

152 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, only have work on the engine carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display gives you information on howeconomical your driving style is. The ECOdisplay assists you in achieving the optimumdriving style in terms of consumption, takingthe actual and selected conditions intoconsideration. Your driving style cansignificantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationRConstantRCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and the mean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher

percentage indicates a more economicaldriving style.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption and a fixed percentagecount in the ECO display does not indicate afixed consumption figure.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RLoadRTire pressureRCold startRChoice of routeRElectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not taken intoconsideration by the ECO display.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAcceleration (evaluation of all

acceleration processes)- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,

especially at higher speeds- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behavior

at all times)- The bar fills up: constant speed and

avoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all deceleration

processes)- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,

keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAcceleration and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.

Driving tips 153

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for Constantwill change.

i The ECO display summaries the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. For more dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

Further information on the ECO display(Y page 190).

Brakes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shifting toa lower gear in good time. This allows youto take advantage of the engine's brakingeffect. For this, you need to have selectedmanual drive program M. This helps you toavoid overheating the brakes and wearingthem out excessively.When you take advantage of the engine'sbraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedalon downhill gradients while the manualdrive program M is temporarily activated:the automatic transmission may switch to

the last active automatic drive program Eor S. The automatic transmission may shiftto a higher gear. This can reduce theengine's braking effect.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakes when braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after thevehicle has been washed or driven throughdeep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs and

154 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

brake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possible

salt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axledynamometer. If you are planning to havethe vehicle tested on such a dynamometer,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain further information first.Otherwise, you could damage the drivetrain or the brake system.

! As the ESP® system operatesautomatically, the engine and the ignitionmust be switched off (the SmartKey mustbe in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested on a

brake dynamometer (for a maximum often seconds)Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle

raised.Braking triggered automatically by ESP®

may seriously damage the brake system.All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop. Consult aqualified specialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 59).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Checking brake lining thicknessYou can measure the break pad/liningthickness using a test gauge. Color-coding(green or red) on the test gauge allows you todetermine whether the brake pad/liningthickness is still sufficient. The test gauge isin the vehicle document wallet in the glovebox.

Driving tips 155

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Front wheel

Rear wheelX Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable

position so that you can attach test gaugeA.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 149).

X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Place test gauge A between the wheel's

spokes on brake pad/lining =.

X Hold test gauge A vertically on brakedisc : and slide measuring pin ; ontobrake disc :.

X Check which color field ? the arrow onmeasuring pin ; is pointing to.Green: the brake pad/lining thickness issufficient.Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is notsufficient. Have the brake pads/liningchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i To avoid an inaccurate measurement:Rmake sure you position the wheels

suitablyRdo not put the measuring pin on a recess

in the brake disc

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.

Check the depth of any water before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

156 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Winter driving

General notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 300).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 300).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 301).

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Cruisecontrol is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheels

Driving systems 157

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

to lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snowIf there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select a low gear ingood time. For this, you will need to haveselected manual drive programM(Y page 144). By doing so, you will makeuse of the braking effect of the engine, Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed

When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must be

released.Ryou are driving faster than

20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,

the selector lever must be in position D.

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever

up : or down ;.X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up thelast stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate

158 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph

increments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : ordown ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards =.orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake.Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph

(30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Ryou shift the transmission to position N

while driving.If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.

stopped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearlyidentify other road users and complex trafficsituations.

Driving systems 159

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheels

to lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snowDISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, in

parking garagesIf DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects avehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS mayunexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to thestored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane

or an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-hand

lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane

that you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden, you mustselect a low gear in good time. For this, youwill need to have selected manual driveprogram M(Y page 154). By doing so, you willmake use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system and

160 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

prevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. Itmaintains the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannotprevent a collision without your intervention.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must be:Ractivated (Y page 199)RoperationalDISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph

(25 km/h) and there is no longer a vehiclein front orRthe vehicle in front is no longer detectedIf there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). If avehicle is driving in front of you, it operates inthe speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or calling up

the last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing,maintaining and calling up a speed

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of thefollowing activation conditions must befulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

to two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must be

released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.

Driving systems 161

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors

must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

ActivatingTo activate while driving: when driving atspeeds below 14 mph (20 km/h), you canonly activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehiclein front has been detected and is shown in themultifunction display. If the vehicle in front isno longer detected and displayed,DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tonesounds.X Briefly pull the cruise control level towards

you ?, or press it up : or down ;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup : or down ; until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passivemessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

To activate when driving towards a stationary vehicle: if the vehicle in front isstationary, you can only activate DISTRONICPLUS if your vehicle is also stationary.X Briefly pull the cruise control level towards

you ?, or press it up : or down ;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated atunder 14 mph (20 km/h) if a vehicle in front

has been detected. It is therefore helpful tohave the DISTRONIC PLUS distance displayactivated in the multifunction display(Y page 194).

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup : or down ; until the desired speedis set.

i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on thecruise control lever to set the specifiedminimum distance (Y page 165).

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments ; in the set speed range lightup.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments ; between speed of the vehicle infront : and stored speed = light up.

162 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activatedin the multifunction display: DISTRONIC PLUS activated; Own vehicle= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Vehicle in front, if detected

In the Assistance menu (Y page 194) of theon-board computer, you can select thedistance display.X Select the Distance Display function

using the on-board computer(Y page 194).

i You will see the stored speed for aboutfive seconds when you activate DISTRONICPLUS.

DrivingIf you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.Pulling awayX If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove

your foot from the brake pedal.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever

(Y page 161) towards you.orX Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes your

vehicle. In this way, the distance you haveselected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannotprevent a collision without your intervention.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance from thevehicle in front, or take evasive action,provided it is safe to do so.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is driving faster, it accelerates yourvehicle, but only up to the speed you havestored.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40mph

(60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the

distance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger

of collisionIf these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will beinterrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated

with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a

Driving systems 163

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

vehicle occupant or from outside thevehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,

e.g. by a vehicle occupant.There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 165).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to astandstill at a sufficient distance behind thevehicle in front. The specified minimumdistance is set using the control on thecruise control lever.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is

automatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

Storing the current speed or calling up thelast stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever(Y page 161) towards you.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

164 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X Press the cruise control lever up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : ordown ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

Setting the specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 163).

i Make sure that you maintain theminimum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control = indirection ;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control = indirection :.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards :.orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

Driving systems 165

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if

the vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 7 mph

(10km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,or if the vehicle in front is no longerdetectedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards

you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.In the Assistance menu (Y page 194) of theon-board computer, you can select thedistance display.

Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

X Select the Distance Display functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 194).

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

166 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for

example, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

HOLD function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by

pressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Driving systems 167

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 168).

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep

slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been

automatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt

is fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission position D, R or N is

engaged while driving a vehicle with anautomatic transmissionRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

until : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic

transmission: only when the transmissionis in position D or R.Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles

with automatic transmission.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a

certain amount of pressure until :disappears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric

parking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

168 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The electronic parking brake secures thevehicle automatically if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is

automatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the electric parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects intoconsideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,

animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, truck overhangs orloading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Side view

Driving systems 169

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 275).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40in (approx.100cm)

Corners Approx. 24in (approx.60cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32in (approx.80cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

Corners Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located

on the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated on the headliner in the rearcompartment.

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness = light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rollingdetermine which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmission position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.

170 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an

intermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 171

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately20 seconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately20seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 275).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

G WARNINGThe vehicle swings out when parking and indoing so could cross into the opposite lane.This could result in a collision with anotherroad user. There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users whenparking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or

cancel the Active Parking Assist parkingprocedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the

parking space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown

or partially occupied by trailer drawbarsmight be identified incorrectly or not at all.

172 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC

(Y page 170) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedure

to correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudes

from your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow

chains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures are

always correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of thevehicle.

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicle.A suitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. Active steering interventioncan assist you during parking.You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 169). When PARKTRONIC is switchedoff, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.

not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles. In some circumstances, ActiveParking Assist may therefore guide you intothe parking space too early.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range,Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist is automaticallyactivated when driving forwards. The systemis operational at speeds of up toapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While inoperation, the system independently locatesand measures parking spaces on both sidesof the vehicle. When driving at speeds below19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parkingsymbol as a status indicator in the instrumentcluster. By default, Active Parking Assist onlydisplays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on thedriver's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. To parkon the driver's side, you must leave thedriver's side turn signal switched on. Thismust remain switched on until youacknowledge the use of Active Parking Assistby pressing the a button on themultifunction steering wheel.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears.

Example: detected parking space for a vehicle withautomatic transmission: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Driving systems 173

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than

your vehicleA parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you byintervening actively in the steering. If you donot brake there is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself whenmaneuvering and parking.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

Active Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces parallel to the directionof travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe parking space is apparently blocked,

for example by foliage or grass pavingblocksRthe range of movement is too smallRthe parking space is bordered by an

obstacle which is not clearly defined suchas a tree or a trailer

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:

press the a button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake

at all times. Do not exceed a maximumspeed of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h)when backing up. Otherwise Active ParkingAssist will be canceled.

i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up asfar as possible. When doing so, alsoobserve the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Maneuvering may be required in tightparking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D Observe Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D while

the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

174 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The Park Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.X Further transmission shifts may be

necessary.As soon as the parking procedure iscomplete, the Park Assist Finishedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Active Parking Assist is then deactivated.PARKTRONIC is still available.

X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages

displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 170).Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the

parking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you shouldcancel the parking procedure with ActiveParking Assist.RYou can also engage forward gear

prematurely. The vehicle redirects anddoes not drive as far into the parking space.Should a gear be changed too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. Asensible parking position can no longer beachieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist cansupport you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must not

be too low.Rthe border of the parking space must not

be too wide. The system maneuvers thevehicle into a position at a maximum of 45°

to the starting position in the parkingspace.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 24 in

(0.60 m) must be available.Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle using Active Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing

the street.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using Active

Parking Assist: press the a button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being

ready to brake at all times. Do not exceeda maximum speed of approximately6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parkingspace. Otherwise Active Parking Assist willbe canceled.

X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired while the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appearsin the multifunction display.

i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.

Driving systems 175

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-aheadposition.

X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, beingready to brake at all times.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking spacecompletely, the steering wheel is moved tothe straight-ahead position. You hear a toneand the Park Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunction

steering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist Canceledmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the

center console (Y page 171).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceledautomatically if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake.Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no

longer possible.Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph

(10 km/h).Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking spacesymbol disappears and the multifunctiondisplay shows the Park Assist Canceledmessage.If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you muststeer again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. When maneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rthe tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,

e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In

this event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

176 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

General notes

Rear view camera : is in the trunk lid handle.The rear view camera extends, when it isactivated.The rear view camera is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to showthe area behind your vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: make sure that the SmartKey

is in position 2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that in the audio system/

COMAND, the "Activation by R gear"function is selected; see the separateoperating instructions for the audiosystem/COMAND.

X Engage reverse gear.Guide lines are used to show the areabehind the vehicle in the Audio/COMANDdisplay.

To deactivate: the rear view camera isdeactivated if you:Rselect transmission position P (vehicles

with automatic transmission)Rdrive forward ten metersRshift the transmission from R to another

position (after 15 seconds)Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph

(10km/h)

Displays in the Audio/COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgate

handle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

Driving systems 177

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Lanes: White guide line without turning the

steering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle, vehicle width to theouter side of the wheels (dynamic)

= Red guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Bumper

Guide lines? BumperA Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)D Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

The lanes and guide lines are only displayedif you have engaged reverse gear.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONICand COMAND: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND: if PARKTRONIC is operational(Y page 169), an additional operationalreadiness indicator will appear in COMANDdisplay ;.If the PARKTRONIC warningdisplays are active or light up, warningdisplays : and = are also active or light upcorrespondingly in the COMAND display.

Reverse parking functionX Make sure that the rear view camera is

activated and the "Reverse parking"function is selected; see the separateoperating instructions for the audiosystem/COMAND.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

178 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White lane with steering wheel straight; Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

= Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

X With the help of white lane :, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using the white lane as a guide, carefullyreverse until you reach the end position.Red guide line = is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almostparallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angleX Drive past the parking space and bring the

vehicle to a standstill.

Turning the steering wheel: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in itscurrent position

; Parking space markingX While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the

steering wheel in the direction of theparking space until the red lane reachesparking space marking ;.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in itscurrent position

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactlyin front of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking aspossible.

Driving systems 179

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Driving to the final position: White lane at current steering wheel angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center

position while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

; White lane with steering wheel straight= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached

the final position.Red guide line : is then at end of parkingspace =. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).

If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests you take a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering

characteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and length

of journeyThe functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the

surface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style

with high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slower

than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND or

making a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when

you change lanes or change your speed

180 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Warning and display messages in themultifunction display

X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 195).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will notwarn you until at least 20 minutes afteryour journey has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: Drowsiness Detected message appears in themultifunction display.

X If necessary, take a break.X Press the a button to confirm the

message.On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. Theprecondition for this is thatATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open the

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 181) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 183).

Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more than 6.8 mph(11 km/h)

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the

Driving systems 181

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

monitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audiblecollision warning. For this purpose, Blind SpotAssist uses sensors in the rear bumper.For Blind Spot Assist to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must be:Ractivated(Y page 199)Roperational

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain or snowRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbike or bicycleRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radarsensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if the vehicles are driving on theinner side of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, iceor slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Forexample, the radar sensors must not becovered by bicycle racks or overhangingloads. Following a severe impact or in theevent of damage to the bumpers, have thefunction of the radar sensors checked at aqualified specialist workshop. Blind SpotAssist may otherwise not work properly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp : in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).

182 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) theindicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on thecorresponding side lights up red. This warningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in the monitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp :. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system

(Y page 199) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 195) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of a camera atthe top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assistdetects lane markings on the road and warns

you before you leave your laneunintentionally.

: Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select km on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function (Y page 196), Lane Keeping Assistis active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by LaneKeeping Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane

Driving systems 183

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to

insufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane

markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the laneA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 195).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,symbol : is highlighted. Lane KeepingAssist is ready for use.

When Standard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP®.When Adaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a

freeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

184 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Useful information ............................ 186Important safety notes .................... 186Displays and operation .................... 186Menus and submenus ...................... 189Display messages ............................. 200Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 224

185

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed ormalfunctioned, you may not recognizefunction restrictions in systems relevant tosafety. The operating safety of your vehiclemay be impaired. There is a risk of anaccident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only shows messagesor warnings from certain systems in the

multifunction display. You should thereforemake sure your vehicle is operating safely atall times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is notoperating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 29).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicleinterior can be adjusted using the brightnesscontrol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 29).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise

or counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set to Ã, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

186 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side.Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as

this could damage the engine.The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 157):

The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 159):

One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turn

the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 187

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects a

stored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Tel(telephone) menu:

switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects the

previous/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu,

starts rapid scrolling through thephone book

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops the

station search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial

memory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice Control

System; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/calls

up the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redial

memory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in

the Trip menu

Multifunction display

: Time; Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 197)= Text field? Menu bar

188 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

A Drive program (Y page 141)B Transmission position (Y page 141)X To show menu bar ?: press the =

or ; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.Text field = shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audiosystem or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 172)CRUISE Cruise Control (Y page 157)è Rear window wiper (Y page 112)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 102)À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 180)Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 183)ë HOLD function (Y page 167)Ä Distance warning function

(Y page 233)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewOperating the on-board computer(Y page 187).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 189)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)

(Y page 191)RAudio menu (Y page 192)RTel (telephone) menu (Y page 193)RDriveAssist (Assistance) menu

(Y page 194)RServ menu (Y page 196)RSett menu (Y page 196)

The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightlyin vehicles with Audio 20 and in vehicles withCOMAND. The examples given in thisOperator's Manual apply to vehiclesequipped with COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the % button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu withtrip odometer : and odometer ; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.

The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilethe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 190).

Menus and submenus 189

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

The From Start trip computer isautomatically reset when:Rthe ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.If the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles, the From Reset trip computeris automatically reset.

ECO display

Example: ECO displayX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press 9 or : to select ECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will beautomatically reset.Further information on the ECO display(Y page 153).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectcurrent fuel consumption ; andapproximate range :.

Approximate range : is calculatedaccording to the current driving style and theamount of fuel in the tank. If there is only asmall amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, thedisplay shows a vehicle being refueled Cinstead of range :.

Digital speedometer

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectdigital speedometer :.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

function that you wish to reset.X Press the a button.X Press the : button to select Yes and

press a to confirm.

190 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

i When you reset the values in the "ECOdisplay", the values in the trip computer"From start" are likewise reset. When youreset the values in the trip computer "Fromstart", the values in the "ECO display" arelikewise reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsX Switch on Audio 20 with Becker® MAP

PILOT or COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Navi menu.

In the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction

= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Symbol for change of direction

When a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol = for the change of directionand distance graphic ;. The distanceindicator shortens towards the top of thedisplay as you approach the point of theannounced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? New lane during a change of directionA Uninterrupted laneB Symbol for change of direction

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation = for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.

Menus and submenus 191

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or an

intermediate destination.RNew Route... or Calculating Route:

calculating a new routeROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle

position is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo Route: no route could be calculated to

the selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i The memory position is only displayedalong with station ; if this has beenstored.

X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe 9 or : button.

X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the station

search: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

i For information on changing wavebandand storing stations, see the separateoperating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

CD changer display (example): Current CD in the CD changer; Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

and activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3mode; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until desiredtrack ; has been reached.

192 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

If you press and hold 9 or :, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

DVD changer display (example): Current DVD in the DVD changer; Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;

see the separate operating instructions.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Audio menu.X To select the next/previous scene:

briefly press the 9 or : button.X To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until desiredscene ; has been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on your mobile phone and audio

system or COMAND, see the separateoperating instructions.

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to theaudio system or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming callX Press the 6 button on the steering

wheel to accept an incoming call.If someone calls you when you are in theTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.If you are not in the Tel menu, you can stillaccept a call.

Menus and submenus 193

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the ~ button on the steering

wheel.If you are not in the Tel menu, you can stillreject or end a call.

Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 9, : or a button to

switch to the phone book.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name.To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the9 or : button for longer than onesecond.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or abutton to display the numbers.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the 6 or a button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: press

the ~ or % button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 6 button to switch to the

redial memory.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name or number.

X Press the 6 or a button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: press

the ~ or % button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:Rshowing the distance displayRactivating/deactivating ESP®

Ractivating/deactivating the distancewarning functionRactivating/deactivating ATTENTION

ASSISTRactivating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistRactivating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist

Showing the distance displayX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectDistance Display.

X Press the a button.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance displayappears in the multifunction display(Y page 163).

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Further information about ESP®(Y page 62).

194 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Start the engine.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectESP.

X Press the a button.X To deactivate: press a again.

The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

X To activate: press a again.The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Switching the distance warningfunction on and offX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press 9 or : to select Distance Warning.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.

When the distance warning function isactivated, the multifunction display showsthe Ä symbol if the HOLD function is notactivated (Y page 167).Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: ifPARKTRONIC is activated and you are drivingat a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the jActive Parking Assist symbol is shown insteadof the Ä symbol (Y page 172).Further information on the distance warningfunction (Y page 60).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press 9 or : to select Attention Asst.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.

When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 180) isactivated, the À symbol appears in themultifunction display when the ignition is on.

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot Assist.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 181).When the Blind Spot Assist: Sensors Deactivated message is shown, the radarsensors are deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system

(Y page 199).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press 9 or : on the steering wheelto select Lane Keep. Asst.

Menus and submenus 195

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,Standard or Adaptive.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

If Lane Keeping Assist is activated(Y page 183) and the ignition is switched on,the à symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Maintenance menu

In the Serv menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in message

memory (Y page 200)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning

system (Y page 305)RCalling up the service due date

(Y page 270)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the Sett menu, you have the followingoptions:Rchanging the instrument cluster settingsRchanging the light settingsRchanging the vehicle settings

Rchanging the convenience settingsRrestoring the factory settings

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting km ormiles.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi

menuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offOnly vehicles with manual transmission havethis function.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

196 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Press : or 9 to select theSpeedometer [mph]: function.You will see the selected setting: On orOff.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

i Speed is displayed in mph.The Speedometer [mph] function allows youto choose whether the status area in themultifunction display always shows the speedin mph instead of the outside temperature.

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting Outside Temperature or Speedometer [km/h](USA)/Speedometer [mph] (Canada).

X Press the a button to save the setting.

i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph(Canada).

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offDaytime running lamps are required by law(Canada only). You cannot set the "daytimerunning lamps" function via the on-boardcomputer.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theDaytime Running Lights function.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 99).

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAdaptive Highbeam Assist function.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

For further information about AdaptiveHighbeam Assist, see (Y page 102).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-function.You will see the selected setting.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the

brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright).

X Press the a or % button to save thesetting.

Menus and submenus 197

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offIf you have activated the Locator Lighting: function and the light switch is setto Ã, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting

remains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 99).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the

exterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,the exterior lighting goes off after15 seconds.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLocator Lighting function.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:

RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInterior Lighting Delay function.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

If you select the Automatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).

i For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 74).

198 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock Feedback: function, an acoustic signalsounds when you lock the vehicle.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAcoustic Lock Feedback: function.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual).You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Convenience

Switching the fold-in mirrors whenlocking feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 95).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theFold Mirrors in when Locking:You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

If you switch on the Fold Mirrors in when Locking: function, the exterior mirrors foldin when you lock the vehicle. If you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold outagain.If you have switched the function on and youfold the exterior mirrors in using the buttonon the door (Y page 93), they will not fold outautomatically. The exterior mirrors can thenonly be folded out using the button on thedoor.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.

X Press a to confirm.The Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the : or 9 button to selectNo or Yes.

X Press a to confirm the selection.If you have selected Yes , the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights: function in the Lights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

Menus and submenus 199

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 167) and parking (Y page 149).

Hiding display messagesX Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.

The display message is cleared.The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You cancall up the display messages:X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv menu.

If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 Messages.X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Press a to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

200 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill startassist are temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,

making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps lightup in the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.

Display messages 201

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,

making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

202 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailabledue to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, theHOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to amalfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 150).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

Display messages 203

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsPlease Release Parking Brake The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 150).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake See Operator's Manual

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 150).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

204 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 320).X Shift the transmission to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 150).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 205

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inoperative

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because ofovervoltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by

charging the battery or restarting the engine.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USAonly)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while theignition was switched off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

206 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake Fluid Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

6SRS Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on occupant safety (Y page 38).

Display messages 207

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6Front Left Malfunction Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunction Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Center Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowcurtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:

208 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Left Cornering Light or Check Right Cornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 209

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Fog Lamp or Check Right Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

210 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 104).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive Light System Inoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction See Operator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 211

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 269).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

212 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out

and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 213

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

(Y page 267).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 268).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (USA only).

æFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

æGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

214 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÀAttention Assist: Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention Assist Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 167).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function

(Y page 167).

Radar Sensor Deactivated See Operator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 199).

Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Clean the windshield.

Display messages 215

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's ManualBlind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature

range.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Clean the sensors (Y page 275).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the

driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the

multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 172).

216 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Park Assist Inoperative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again afterapproximately ten minutes (Y page 172).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 159). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 159).

DISTRONIC PLUS Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirtyRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 275).X Restart the engine.

Display messages 217

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may alsohave failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Passive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS--- mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 161).

Cruise Control Inoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and

store the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

(Y page 158).

218 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

CheckTire Pressure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 281).X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire

pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire

pressure is correct (Y page 305).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart Run Flat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a displaymessage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 305).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 219

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before

you switch off the engine.X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Depress Brake to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake and Start Engine

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or Dwithout starting the engine.X Start the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P tothe desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only thencan the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress thebrake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but theparking lock remains engaged.

i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) youcan only shift out of position P into another transmissionposition when the engine is running.

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission Not in PRisk of Vehicle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, Nor D.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).

220 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Service Required Do Not Shift GearsVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the

transmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shiftto 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Shift the transmission to position P.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot backup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine Running

The automatic transmission has overheated.X Drive on carefully.

The automatic transmission is available again when the displaymessage goes out.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the

display message has disappeared.

Display messages 221

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

ÐPower Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified

specialist workshop.X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol

appears in the multifunction display.

222 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.

i If you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the wintermonths, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluidreservoir. In this case the Check Washer Fluid displaymessage could also be shown in the multifunction display.

X Add washer fluid (Y page 269).

Wiper Malfunctioning

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

+Take Your Key from Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

+Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 223

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).

The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).

The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Inaddition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you havebriefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you aredriving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

224 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the

malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD functionand hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 225

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, forexample.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight

steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

226 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assistare unavailable, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)֌!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®

and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assistare also unavailable, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 227

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP®

warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are deactivated. ESP® will notstabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD functionand hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

228 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight

steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 229

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red indicator lampfor the electric parkingbrake flashes or lightsup and/or the yellowwarning lamp for theelectric parking brakelights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 38).

230 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warninglamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legalrequirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler

cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist

workshop.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gage is atthe start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 231

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 269). Observe

the warning notes.X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is

under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Vapor from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).

232 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 269). Observe

the warning notes.X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next

qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to

brake or take evasive action.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 233

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

234

Useful information ............................ 236Loading guidelines ............................ 236Stowage areas .................................. 237Features ............................................. 247

235

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running,particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening thetailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. For this reason,you should observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight or the gross axle

weight rating of the vehicle (includingoccupants). The values are specified on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar ofthe driver's door.RThe cargo compartment is the preferred

place to carry objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as

possible and as low down in the cargocompartment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the

upper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear or

front seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible.RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel

nets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening

materials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RHook in the cargo net when loading.RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage

well under the cargo compartment floor is55 lbs (25 kg).RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and

wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edgesfor protection.

! Do not position the load on one part of thefolding cargo compartment floor only. Themaximum load capacity of the folding cargocompartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg).Distribute the weight evenly to avoiddamaging the cargo compartment floor.Place a solid board under the load ifnecessary. Please note that the load on thecargo compartment floor will be increasedwhen the load is lashed down.

236 Loading guidelinesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not

protrude from stowage spaces, parcel netsor stowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces while

driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle : and open glove boxflap ;.

X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwardsuntil it engages.

i There is a pen holder at the top of theglove box flap.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking :.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

X To open: press the marking on cover :.i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,

there is an open instead of a closedstowage compartment or an ashtray in thecenter console.

Stowage areas 237

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Stowage compartment in front of thearmrest (vehicles with automatictransmission)

X To open: press the marking on cover :.

i You can remove the non-slip mat and theinsert for cleaning. When removing theinsert you will have to overcome someslight resistance.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: on vehicles with moveablearmrests, make sure that the armrest is inthe rearmost position.

X Press button : and fold the armrest up.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for mobile audioequipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate COMAND OperatingInstructions).

Stowage compartment under the driver'sseat and front-passenger seatG WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for thestowage compartment, the cover may not beable to restrain the items. Items may bethrown out of the stowage compartment andhit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the cargocompartment.

The maximum permissible load of thestowage compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle : up and foldcover ; forwards.

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear centerconsole

238 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X To open: pull down the top of stowagecompartment : by the edge of the handle.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,there may be an open stowage space abovethe stowage compartment.

Folding tableG WARNINGIf the folding table is folded out while thevehicle is in motion, passengers can bethrown against it, particularly in the event ofan accident, heavy braking or a suddenchange of direction. There is a risk of injury.Fold the folding table away before eachjourney.

! Do not load the folding table with morethan the maximum permissible load of4.4 lbs (2 kg).

X To fold out: pull folding table : up in thedirection of the arrow to the desiredposition.

X To fold away: push folding table : downonto the backrest.

Parcel netsParcel nets are located in the front-passengerfootwell and on the back of the driver's andthe front-passenger seat.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 237).

Folding backrest on the front-passenger seat

G WARNINGIf the backrest of the front-passenger seat isfolded forward, rear seat passengers cancome in contact with parts of the seatmechanism. particularly in the event of anaccident, heavy braking or a sudden changeof direction. There is a risk of injury.If a passenger travels in the vehicle while thefront-passenger seat is folded forward, theymust sit in the rear seat behind the driver.

The backrest of the front-passenger seat canbe folded forwards to increase the cargocompartment capacity.

X To fold forward: gently push the backrestback.

X Pull release handle : and fold thebackrest fully onto the seat cushion until itengages.

X To fold back: gently push the backrestdown and pull release handle :.

X Fold the seat backrest back until itengages.

Through-loading facility in the rearObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 236).

Stowage areas 239

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

X To open: fold down seat armrest :.X Pull the cover, which can now be seen,

forwards by the grip until it lies onarmrest :.

X Pull the center head restraint on the rearbench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 89).

X Slide locking mechanism = in thedirection of the arrow.

X Swing flap ; fully to the side.Flap ; is held open by a magnet.

X To close: swing flap ; in the cargocompartment back until it engages.

X Fold the cover forwards until it engages intoarmrest :.

X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.

Cargo compartment enlargement

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could foldforwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be

pushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo

compartment cannot be restrained by theseat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

! Before folding the backrest in the rearcompartment forwards, make sure that therear compartment armrest and thecupholder are folded in. They mayotherwise be damaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).

Vehicles without the EASY-VARIO-PLUSsystem

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardThe left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded forwards separatelyto increase the cargo compartment capacity.

240 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X Fully insert the backrest head restraints(Y page 90).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Pull left-hand or right-hand releasehandle ; of the seat backrest forwards.Corresponding seat backrest : isreleased.

X Fold backrest : forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

back if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.Red lock status indicator ; is no longervisible.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 90).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUSsystem

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardThe left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded forwards separatelyto increase the cargo compartment capacity.

X Fully insert the backrest head restraints(Y page 90).

X Move the rear seat as far back as possible(Y page 243).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Pull right or left loop ; on the backrest inthe direction of the arrow.Corresponding seat backrest : isreleased.

X Fold down backrest : fully.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

back if necessary.

Stowage areas 241

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Folding the rear seat backrest back

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Swing backrest : back.X Adjust the backrest to the desired angle by

pulling the loop (Y page 242).X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 90).X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

back if necessary.

Notes on using the cargo compartment

Load position

Making the best use of your cargocompartment:RLoad capacity is increased when

backrest : is set to the load position (90°)(Y page 242).RVehicles with a height-adjustable trunk

floor: a level load surface can be obtainedby moving the trunk floor to the upperposition (Y page 246).RA larger load area can be obtained by

moving the rear bench seat as far forwardas possible (Y page 243).RThe load area can be lengthened by folding

forward the folding backrest of the front-passenger seat (Y page 239) and thecorresponding backrest in the rear.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seatbackrestsYou can set the angle of the seat backreststo one of 13 detent positions.

X Pull right or left release loop ; forwards inthe direction of the arrow.Corresponding seat backrest : isreleased.

X Pull backrest : forward in the direction ofthe arrow, or push it back and let it engage.

X To ensure that the backrest has engaged,lean firmly against backrest :.

i The angle and fore/aft position of the leftand right rear seats can be separatelyadjusted for each seat in order to makebetter use of the cargo compartment.

242 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Depending on the angle of the backrest,therefore, the right and left rear seats canbe pushed back varying distances until thebackrest is resting against the cargocompartment cover.If the backrest comes into contact withsurrounding parts of the cargocompartment paneling, reduce the angle ofthe backrest.

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position! When moving the rear seats back, make

sure there are no objects in the footwell orbehind the seats. The rear seats and/or theobjects could otherwise be damaged.

X Lift the left or right release handle and slidethe corresponding seat forwards orbackwards.

X Let go of the release handle again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines

(Y page 236).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down

rings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down

rings evenly.

RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges

or corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.There are four cargo tie-down rings in thecargo compartment.

: Cargo tie-down rings

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items ofluggage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum loadof 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

There is one bag hook on either side of thecargo compartment.

Stowage areas 243

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

: Bag hook

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the eventof an accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargocompartment higher than the lower edge ofthe side windows. Do not place heavyobjects on top of the cargo compartmentcover.

! When removing and installing the cargocompartment cover, ensure that its endcaps do not scrape the light-colored partsof the vehicle.

The cargo compartment cover is locatedbehind the rear bench seat backrest.

Extending/retracting the cargocompartment cover

X To extend: pull the cargo compartmentcover back by grab handle : and clip itinto retainers ; on the left and right.

X To retract: unhook the cargo compartmentcover from retainers ; on the left and rightand guide it forwards by grab handle :until it is fully retracted.

Installing/removing the cargocompartment cover

X To remove: make sure that the cargocompartment cover is rolled up.

X Push in the end cap of cargo compartmentcover : in the direction of the arrow onthe right or left side using grip =.

X Push cargo compartment cover : intoopposite anchorage ;.

X Remove cargo compartment cover :upwards.

244 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X To install: set cargo compartmentcover : on the right or left-hand side inanchorage ;.

X Push in the opposite end cap of cargocompartment cover : in the direction ofthe arrow and insert cargo compartmentcover : into opposite anchorage ;.

Cargo net

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo net cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggage andheavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecuredload during sudden changes in direction,braking or in the event of an accident. Thereis an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you loadthe vehicle with small objects above the seatbackrests. For safety reasons, always use acargo net when transporting loads.The cargo net is located in the stowage spaceunder the cargo compartment floor(Y page 245).X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the

cargo net.X Unroll and unfold the cargo net.

The joints on the upper and lower guide rodshould engage audibly.

The corresponding cargo tie down rings fortightening the cargo net are in the cargocompartment (Y page 243).

Attaching and tightening the cargo net

X To attach and tighten: insert guiderod : into bracket ;.

X Attach belt hook ? to the cargo tie-downring and pull down on the loose end of thelashing strap until the cargo net is taut.

X After driving a short distance, check thetension of the cargo net and retighten it ifnecessary.

X To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp= up to reduce the tension in the lashingstrap.

X Unhook belt hook ? from the cargo tie-down ring.

X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;.X To stow: press the red button on the upper

and lower guide rod.X Fold the cargo net and roll it up.X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo

net holder.

Stowage well under the cargocompartment floor

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive when the cargo compartment flooris open, objects could be flung around, thusstriking vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.

Stowage areas 245

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Always close the cargo compartment floorbefore a journey.

! The maximum load capacity of thestowage well under the cargo compartmentfloor is 55 lbs (25 kg).

Opening/closing the cargocompartment floorA bracket for TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc.is located underneath the cargocompartment floor.

X To open: open the tailgate.X Press down handle : on ribbing ;.

Handle : folds up.X Swing the cargo compartment floor

upwards using handle : until it restsagainst the cargo compartment cover.

X Fold out hook = on the underside of thecargo compartment floor.

X Attach hook = to the cargocompartment's upper seal ?.

X To close: detach hook = from seal ?.X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the

underside of the cargo compartment floor.X Fold the trunk floor down.X Press the trunk floor down until it engages.

Setting the height of the trunk floorThe stowage well under the cargocompartment floor can be increased ordecreased in size as necessary. To do this,you can lock the floor at two different heights.The upper catch gives a flat load surface whenthe rear bench seat is folded forward.

246 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X To raise: using handle :, lift up cargocompartment floor ; in the direction ofarrow = and pull it upwards.

X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again.To do this, push the trunk floor away so thatit engages in the guide on the upper level.Cargo compartment floor ; engages inthe upper position.

i Carry out this step using both hands.X To lower: raise cargo compartment

floor ; slightly using handle : and pull ittowards you.

X Lower cargo compartment floor ; againslowly. Whilst doing so, press the trunkfloor into the lower level.Cargo compartment floor ; engages inthe lower position.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the drivingcharacteristics change. If you exceed themaximum roof load, the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering andbraking, will be greatly impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to thevehicle.Position the load on the roof rack in such away that the vehicle will not sustaindamage even when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and

open the tailgate fully when the roof carrieris installed.

The maximum roof load is 165 lbs((75 kg).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers : carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers : upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the

anchorage points under covers :.X Observe the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot hold a container securewhilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilsttraveling, the container may be flung aroundand liquid may be spilled. The vehicleoccupants may come into contact with theliquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. Youmay be distracted from the traffic conditionsand you could lose control of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Features 247

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only use the cup holder forcontainers of the right size. Always close thecontainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not

protrude from stowage spaces, parcel netsor stowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces while

driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

The stowage compartments in the doorsprovide space for bottles:Rfront: capacity up to 51 fl. oz. (1.5 l)Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter consoleThe cup holder and the rubber matunderneath can be removed for cleaning.Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only.

X To remove: carefully pull in upper sectionsof cup holder : on the driver's and front-passenger sides until they release.

X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it canbe removed.

X To install: insert the cup holder into lateralcurved sections ; in the stowagecompartment. Insert the cup holder so thatthe wedge of the upper section of cupholder : faces forwards.

X Press the cup holder downwards until itengages on the right and left-hand sides.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight

on the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

248 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder :

or ;.Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder : or ; backuntil it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light : only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket ; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.X Vehicles with mirror lights: slide the sun

visor horizontally as desired.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray is

not heat resistant. Before placing litcigarettes in the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,the stowage space could be damaged.

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartmentX To open: push the lower section of

cover :.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: lift insert =up ; and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert =into the holder until it engages.

Features 249

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

i If you remove the ashtray insert, you canuse the resulting compartment forstowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in

the direction of arrow ? until it audiblyreleases.

X Lift insert ; up and out.X To install the insert: place insert ; from

above into the holder and press down untilit engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for exampleThere is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette

lighter when road and traffic conditionspermit.

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartmentX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).X To open: push the lower section of

cover :.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter ;.Cigarette lighter ; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

12 V sockets

Points to observe before useX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the

ignition lock (Y page 135).The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

250 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

Vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartmentX To open: push the lower section of

cover :.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket ;.

Vehicles without a cover over the stowagecompartmentX Lift up the cover of socket :.

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover : out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket ;.

Socket in the cargo compartment

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

mbrace

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement to

activate the mbrace service. Make surethat your system is activated and ready foruse. To register, press the ï MB Info callbutton. If any of the steps mentioned arenot carried out, the system may not beactivated.

Features 251

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user IDand password will be sent to you by post. USAonly: you can use this password to log ontothe mbrace area under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network

is available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to

the Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press the W or X button on the

multifunction steering wheel.orX Use the volume controller of the audio

system/COMAND.The mbrace system provides variousservices, e.g.:Rautomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info call

USA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside

Assistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call

button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the

following buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- the F Roadside Assistance call

button- the ï MB Info call buttonRThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace Service Not Activated messageappears in the multifunction display afterthe system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate asexpected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

252 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Emergency call

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement to

activate the mbrace service. Make surethat your system is activated and ready foruse. To register, press the ï MB Info callbutton. If any of the steps mentioned arenot carried out, the system may not beactivated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (as

determined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center and the vehicleoccupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more informationon the emergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle

occupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

The mbrace system has not been able toinitiate an emergency call if no voiceconnection to the Response Center has beenestablished. This can occur, for example, ifthe relevant mobile phone network is notavailable. The indicator lamp in the SOSbutton flashes continuously.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, seek assistance by other means.

Making an emergency callG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the

vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after anaccidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of

roadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be

seen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this orsimilar situations as soon as it is safe to doso. Move to a safe location along with othervehicle occupants. In such situations, securethe vehicle in accordance with nationalregulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.

Features 253

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button ;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover :.

i If the mobile phone network is notavailable, mbrace is not able to make anemergency call. If you leave the vehicleimmediately after pressing the SOS button,you do not know if mbrace has successfullymade the emergency call. In this situation,seek additional assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button :.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in Roadside Assistance button :

flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears onthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance center can ascertain the nature ofthe problem (Y page 258).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arranges for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You may be chargedfor services such as repair work and/ortowing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate aRoadside Assistance call if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside

Assistance call button : is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.

254 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button :.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in MB Info call button : flashes whilethe connection is being made. TheConnecting Call message appears onthe multifunction display. The audio systemis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants. You canobtain information on how to operate yourvehicle's systems, on the location of thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,and on further products and services offeredby Mercedes-Benz USA.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate anMB Info call if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call

button : is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

Features 255

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe ~ button on the multifunction

steering wheelRthe corresponding button on the audio

system or on COMAND for ending atelephone call

i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio outputis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwould like to use your mobile phone, do soonly when the vehicle is stationary and in asafe location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDestination Download gives you access to adata bank with over 15 million Points ofInterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and datatransfer is possible.

i You can only use the DestinationDownload function if the vehicle isequipped with a navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through thecurrent route section.

Search & Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehicle

must be equipped with mbrace and anavigation system. You must also have anmbrace service subscription.

"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. A destination address which is foundon Google Maps® can be transferred viambrace directly to your vehicle's navigationsystem.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://

www.maps.google.com and enter adestination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the correspondingbutton.

i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:In the relevant field, enter the e-mailaddress which you specified whenactivating your mbrace account.

X Click "Send".

256 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Sending" can befound on the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.

The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidancewith the address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than onedestination address, each individualdestination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benzvehicles with mbrace and active mbraceaccounts:if multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available. Thevehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote openingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,

Blackberry)To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby. The vehicle can then belocked by the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your PIN.

The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the Doors

Features 257

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Locked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,

Blackberry)To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then attempts to locate the mbracesystem. The Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement agency if the vehicleis located. However, only the lawenforcement agency is informed of thelocation of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center isautomatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representative

can use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle iscalled.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the Roadside Assistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is able to be started,the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.X Press Yes to confirm the message.X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please switch on ignition. message appears:turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears: follow theinstructions of the customer servicerepresentative.The message in the display disappears.If you select Cancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis activated message appears.

When the check is finished, the Sending vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer.) messageappears. The vehicle data can now be sent tothe Customer Assistance center.X Press OK to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnosis: Transferring data... appears.

258 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oil

level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the E-Mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 25).Information on roadside assistance(Y page 22).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet. Each route caninclude up to 20 way points. When a route hasbeen received by the navigation system, the'Route name' has been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? message appears on theCOMAND display. The route is saved to theSD memory card.

X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.

i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle. If thisselected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, amessage will be sent to the CustomerAssistance center. The Customer Assistancecenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.The data which is sent to the CustomerAssistance center contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was

exceededRthe time at which the speed limit was

exceededRthe selected speed limit which was

exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas

Features 259

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

simultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bySMS.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener,persons in the range of movement of thegarage door can become trapped or struck bythe garage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows you

to operate up to three different door and gatesystems.Only operate garage doors using theintegrated garage door opener if:Rthey are equipped with a safety stop and

reverse feature, andRthey conform to the current U.S. safety

standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515

(free of charge)More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also availableonline at http://www.homelink.com.

i Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 23).

Programming

Programming buttonsObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 260).

260 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote control A is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X The first time before programming, clear

the integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 263).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp : lightsup yellow.

i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soonas button ;, = or ? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp : will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicatorlamp : flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote control Atowards buttons ; to ? on the rear-viewmirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).

i The required distance between remotecontrol A and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might benecessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold button B on remote controlA until indicator lamp : lights up green.If indicator lamp : lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release button B on remote control A forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote control A and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 260).Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the program button of the door or

gate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"programming of additional remotecontrols").

i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button ;,= or ? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Features 261

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers alsofeature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming the

garage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp : lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

X Press button B of garage door remotecontrol A for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press button B again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on button B of

remote control A until indicator lamp :lights up green.If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage

door drive remote control A. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.

The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door

remote control A. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the same

garage door drive is available, repeat thesame programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrol A.RNote that some remote controls only

transmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press button B on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press button ;, = or ? which you have

programmed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp : lights up green.

262 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp : flashes green.

i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp : lightsup yellow. Press button ;, = or ? againif necessary.

Clearing the memoryX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press buttons ; and ?.

The indicator lamp lights up yellow.X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the

indicator lamp turns green.

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Compass

Calling up the compassThe compass displays in which compassdirection the vehicle is currently traveling: N,NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.

To receive a correct display in rear-viewmirror :, the compass must be calibratedand the magnetic field zone set.

Setting the compassX Determine your position using the following

zone maps.

North America zone map

South America zone map

Features 263

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 263) for approximately threeseconds.The zone currently selected appears incompass display ;(Y page 263).

X To select the zone: push a round pen intoopening =(Y page 263) until the desiredzone is selected.If, after a few seconds, the display incompass display ;(Y page 263) changesdirection, the zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compassX Make sure that there is sufficient space for

you to drive in a circle without impedingtraffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly,do the following:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not

in the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the

climate control, windshield wipers or rearwindow defroster.Rclose all doors and the tailgate.X Switch on the ignition.X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 263) for approximately sixseconds, until symbol C is shown incompass display ;(Y page 263).

X Drive your vehicle in a full circle atapproximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph(10 km/h).When the calibration has successfully beencompleted, the current direction is shownin compass display ;(Y page 263).

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the

footwell.X Press safety catch knobs : onto

retainers ;.X To remove: pull the floormat off

retainers ;.X Remove the floormat.

264 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Useful information ............................ 266Engine compartment ........................ 266Maintenance ...................................... 270Care .................................................... 271

265

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment,Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is a

risk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRkeep clothing away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injectionsystem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignitionsystem or fuel injection system when theignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

266 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off.

X Pull release lever : on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap between the hood andthe radiator trim and press hood catchlever ; to the left.

X Raise the hood.

X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into

yellow retaining clip =.

Closing the hoodX Raise the hood slightly and, at the same

time, remove support strut ? from yellowretaining clip =.

X Swing support strut ? down and press itinto bracket A until it engages.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Do not press the hoodclosed. Open the hood again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oilover a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). Theoil consumption may be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for

approximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operating

temperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly: wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Engine compartment 267

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide

tube.X Wipe off oil dipstick :.X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide

tube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark = andMAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled nextto the filler neck. Let the engine cool downand thoroughly clean the engine oil off thecomponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with the

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have

not been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after

the interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove

it.X Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)of engine oil.

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 268).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 332).

268 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized,particularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

! The coolant may only be checked andcorrected when the engine is cool (coolanttemperature below 104 ‡ (40 †).Checking the coolant when the coolanttemperature is above 104 ‡ (40 †) mayresult in damage to the engine or to theengine cooling system.

ExampleX Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when thevehicle is on a level surface and the enginehas cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 135).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below104 ‡ (40 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 135) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank ;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 333).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

ExampleX To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck

until it engages.

Engine compartment 269

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.The recommended minimum amount whentopping up is 1 liter. If the water level dropsbelow this, a message appears in themultifunction display prompting you to refillthe washer fluid (Y page 223).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 334).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 267).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RNext Service A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection witha number or another letter, shows the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods of

time during which the battery isdisconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayed

in the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract

the battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press % or a.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Using = or ;, select the Serv.

menu.X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval

display has been inadvertently reset, thissetting can be corrected at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear anddamage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

270 MaintenanceM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle,maintenance work must be carried out morefrequently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent

intermediate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel

short distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor road

surfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long

periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solvents

Do not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

Care 271

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in position N when washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle could be damaged if thetransmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof

are fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off

(the OFF button has been pressed/theairflow control is set to position 0).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position

0.Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at wash bays that are speciallydesigned for this purpose. Observe the legalrequirements in all countries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a

gentle jet of water.X Do not point the water jet directly towards

the air inlet.X Use plenty of water and rinse out the

sponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

272 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Cleaning the wheels! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products

to remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB

Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

The following cannot always be completelyrepaired:RscratchesRcorrosive deposits

Rareas affected by corrosionRdamage caused by inadequate careIn such cases, visit a qualified specialistworkshop.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface orif the paintwork has become dull, then thepaintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning,please use the paint cleaner recommend andapproved by Mercedes Benz.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

wheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable

materials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.

Care 273

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

274 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a power

washer, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

X Clean sensors : of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the area

around the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens :.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the

following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household

cleaning agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

Care 275

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bagdeployment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean

genuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:RDifferences in the textureRSigns of stretching and markingRSlight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

276 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully

with a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does not

become soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that have

been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from aqualified specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth

moistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfiber

cloth moistened with a solutioncontaining 1% detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sections to avoid leavingvisible lines. Leave the seat to dryafterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp

cloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the eventof an accident. This poses an increased riskof injury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts

by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush

or a cleaning agent recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textilecleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 277

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

278

Useful information ............................ 280Where will I find...? ........................... 280Flat tire .............................................. 281Battery (vehicle) ................................ 285Jump-starting .................................... 289Towing and tow-starting .................. 291Fuses .................................................. 294

279

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Where will I find...?

First-aid kit

X Open the tailgate.X To open the stowage compartment: turn

rotary knob : clockwise and fold downcover ;.

X Remove first-aid kit =.

i Check the expiration date on first-aid kit= at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesVehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kitis in the stowage well beneath the cargocompartment floor.Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-change tool kit is in the stowage well beneaththe cargo compartment floor.

i Apart from certain country-specificvariations, the vehicles are not equippedwith a tire-change tool kit. Some tools forchanging a wheel are specific to thevehicle. For more information on whichtools are required and approved to performa wheel change on your vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor; Towing eye= Tire sealant filler bottle

280 Where will I find...?Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X Open the tailgate.X Lift the cargo compartment floor up

(Y page 246).

i Towing eye ; is located under tireinflation compressor :.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kitX Open the tailgate.X Lift the cargo compartment floor up

(Y page 246).X Remove the tire-change tool kit.The tire-change tool kit contains:RJackRLug wrenchROne pair of glovesRFolding wheel chock

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties) (Y page 281)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 280)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 319).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 149).X If possible, bring the front wheels into the

straight-ahead position.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtire must not show any clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 313).MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning system.If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the display

messages (Y page 219).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.

Flat tire 281

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

The maximum driving distance isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the drivingdistance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme drivingconditions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flat mode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, astandard tire may be used as a temporarymeasure. Make sure that you use theproper size and type (summer or wintertire).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when

cornering, accelerating quickly and whenbraking. There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdownassistance, as it is unable to seal the tireproperly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger

than those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures

or on a flat tire.There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive any further. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causesirritation. It must not come into contact withyour skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealantaway from children. There is a risk of injury.

282 Flat tireBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with

your eyes, immediately rinse themthoroughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

Using the TIREFIT kitTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of upto 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outsidetemperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects which

have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, theaccompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tireinflation compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 280).

X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Remove filler hose B and plug = from thebottom section of the tire inflationcompressor housing.

X Slide the yellow filler hose connector intothe mounting on yellow cap A of tiresealant bottle : until the plug engages.

X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellowcap A of tire sealant bottle : into themounting of tire inflation compressor ;until the cap and both hooks engage.

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hose D onto valve.X Insert plug = into the socket of the

cigarette lighter (Y page 250) or into a 12 Vpower socket in your vehicle (Y page 250).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 135).

Flat tire 283

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

X Press on/off switch ? on the tire inflationcompressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.

i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise toapproximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than ten minutes ata time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tire inflation compressor can beoperated again once it has cooled down.

If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasbeen attained after a maximum of after tenminutes, see (Y page 284).If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasnot been attained after a maximum of tenminutes, see (Y page 284).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasnot been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse

approximately 30 ft (10 m).X Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of ten minutes, the tirepressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire

inflation compressor.X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.

284 Flat tireBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,see the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's side B-pillar or tirepressure table on the fuel filler flap).

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release button : next topressure gauge ;.

X To remove the tire sealant bottle from thetire inflation compressor, press togetherthe locking tabs on the yellow cap.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the fillerhose replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan, for example, lead to a short circuit anddamage your vehicle's electronic system. Thiscan disrupt driving safety systems such asABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program).

Battery (vehicle) 285

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lockduring braking. This limits the steerabilityof the vehicle when braking and the brakingdistance may increase. There is a risk ofaccident.RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be

stabilized if it starts to skid or a wheel startsto spin. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore have all work involvingthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. There isa build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.:Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic

fibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the

carpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a

connected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a

battery.

RIt is important that you observe thedescribed order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it is

286 Battery (vehicle)Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

necessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove the

SmartKey. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, suchas the alternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminal

clamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,

the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

WARNING

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoidcontact with the skin, eyes orclothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,in particular gloves, an apron anda face mask.Immediately rinse acid splashesoff with clean water. Consult adoctor if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use batterieswhich have been tested and approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Thesebatteries provide increased impactprotection to prevent vehicle occupants fromsuffering acid burns should the battery bedamaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.Have the battery charge level checked morefrequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle fora lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Only replace a battery with a battery that hasbeen recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

Battery (vehicle) 287

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND,

see the separate operating instructions).Rreset the function for folding the exterior

mirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 93).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 289).

X Open the hood (Y page 266).X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 289).

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this caseyou may neither jump-start the vehicle norcharge the battery. The service life of athawed-out battery may be shorter. Thestarting characteristics can be impaired,particularly at low temperatures. Have thethawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. An accessorybattery charge unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz is available. Itpermits the charging of the battery in itsinstalled position. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation and availability. Read the batterycharger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.

288 Battery (vehicle)Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with

vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting

and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting

the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be

Jump-starting 289

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,

jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected

for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the

jumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine

is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 266).

290 Jump-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B

using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using

the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from

positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering is

malfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply

or the vehicle's electrical system.If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could

rollover.There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 328).

G WARNINGThe vehicle is braked if the HOLD function isactivated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD if thevehicle is to be towed.

Towing and tow-starting 291

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the front axle must beraised or the entire vehicle raised andtransported.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.When towing a vehicle, the transmission mustbe in position N.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in

the ignition lockRcannot shift the transmission to position

N.

i Deactivate the automatic locking feature(Y page 198). You could otherwise belocked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

X Remove the towing eye from the stowagespace.The towing eye is beneath the cargocompartment floor with the vehicle tool kit(Y page 280).Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towingeye is beneath the tire inflationcompressor.

X Press the mark on cover : inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover : off the opening.X Screw in and tighten the towing eye

clockwise to the stop.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover : to the bumper and press

until it engages.X Place the towing eye in the stowage well

beneath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 280) in the cargo compartment.

X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back thetire inflation compressor.

292 Towing and tow-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Towing the vehicle with the front axleraised

! The ignition must be switched off if thevehicle is being towed with the front axleraised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene anddamage the brake system.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition P.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Deactivate automatic locking

(Y page 198).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 101).X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and leave the SmartKey in theignition lock.

When towing your vehicle with the front axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 291).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground

G WARNINGThe power assistance for the steering and thebrake force booster do not work when theengine is not running. You will then needmuch more effort to brake and steer thevehicle. Adapt your style of drivingaccordingly.

i In order to signal a change of directionwhen towing with the hazard warning lampsswitched on, use the combination switch asusual. In this case, only the turn signals forthe desired direction flash. When you resetthe combination switch, the hazardwarning lamps start flashing again.

The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to position P when you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock. In orderto ensure that the automatic transmissionstays in position N when towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position N.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 101).It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 291).

Transporting the vehicle! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels

or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components.Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Shift the transmission to position N.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it.X Secure the vehicle.The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.

Towing and tow-starting 293

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You couldotherwise damage the automatictransmission.

When tow-starting, it is important that youobserve the safety instructions (Y page 291).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higheramperage, the electric cables could beoverloaded. This could result in a fire. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Only use fuses marked with an"S". Otherwise, components or systemscould be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 149).X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it (Y page 135).All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on the

left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellThe fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe front-passenger footwell (Y page 295).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

294 FusesBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture

from the fuse box.X To open: open clamps ;.X Fold up cover : in the direction of the

arrow and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover :.

X Insert cover : at the back into openings= on the fuse box.

X Fold down cover :.X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and

close.X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell

X To open: remove the floormat from thefront-passenger side.

X Fold out perforated floor covering : in thedirection of the arrow.

X To release cover =, press retainingclamp ;.

X Fold out cover = in the direction of thearrow to the catch.

X Remove cover = forwards.

i Fuse allocation chart ? is located on thelower right-hand side of cover =.

X To close: insert cover = on the left-handside of the fuse box into the retainer.Cover = engages in the retainers.

X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lockaudibly.

X Fold back perforated floor covering :.

Fuses 295

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

296

Useful information ............................ 298Important safety notes .................... 298Operation ........................................... 298Winter operation ............................... 300Tire pressure ..................................... 301Loading the vehicle .......................... 306Maximum load rating ....................... 310Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 311Tire labeling ....................................... 312Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 316Changing a wheel ............................. 319Wheel and tire combinations ........... 323Emergency spare wheel ................... 325

297

Whe

els

and

tires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of anaccident.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and

warning notices on MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be found(Y page 323).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flapRunder "Tire pressure"

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Information on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the

tire pressures and correct them ifnecessary.RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,

noises and unusual handlingcharacteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.This may indicate that the wheels or tiresare damaged. If you suspect that a tire isdefective, reduce your speed immediately.Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage.Hidden tire damage could also be causing

298 OperationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

the unusual handling characteristics. If youfind no signs of damage, have the wheelsand tires checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that

the tires do not get deformed by the curbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similarelevations, try to do so slowly and at anobtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,particularly the sidewalls, may bedamaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention todamage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 299). If necessary, turnthe front wheels to full lock in order to inspectthe inner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 301).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Operation 299

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Bar indicator : for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same

type and make.Exception: it is permissible to mount adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 281).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, break in them in

at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles(100 km), as they only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too little

tread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the

latest, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning system and only on wheelsspecifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 281).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 319).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tirespermanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing the i snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions. Only these tires will allow driving

300 Winter operationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

safety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.Use M+S tires of the same make and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 305).X Restart the tire pressure loss warning

system (Y page 305).For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 325).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are mounted on the rearwheels, the snow chains could cause abrasionto the vehicle body or to chassis components.This could cause damage to the vehicle or thetires. There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever mount snow chains on the rear

wheelsRonly mount snow chains in pairs on the

front wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.

If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 323).ROnly use snow chains when driving on

roads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon aspossible when you come to a road that isnot snow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use of

snow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to mount snowchains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RWhen snow chains are installed, never use

Active Parking Assist (Y page 172).

i You may wish to deactivateESP®(Y page 62) when pulling away withsnow chains installed. You can therebyallow the wheels to spin in a controlledmanner, achieving an increased drivingforce (cutting action).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 325).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNINGTires with tire pressures that are too low ortoo high are associated with the followinghazards:Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is

heavily laden or when driven at highspeeds.Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which can severely impair tiretraction.Rthe driving, steering and braking

characteristics may be severely impaired.There is a risk of accident.

Tire pressure 301

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road drivingIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.1.) Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side of thevehicle (Y page 306).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

: Recommended tire pressures

Option 2) Tire pressure table on the insideof the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires for

various operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustrationpurposes only. Tire pressure specificationsare vehicle-specific and may deviate fromthe data shown here. Tire pressurespecifications applicable to your vehicleare located in your vehicle's tire pressuretable.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and

302 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 313).

If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased load

and/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires. Onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.

Tire pressure 303

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Rwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumptionRoverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristics

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristicsRwear quickly and unevenly

Rbe more susceptible to damageRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressuresNever exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe therecommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 301).

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the "Tire pressure information"section (Y page 301).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flapRin the "Tire pressure information" section

304 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to

be checked.X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.X Read the tire pressure and compare it with

the recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 301).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system

Important safety notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.The tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 301).The tire pressure loss warning system doesnot replace the need to regularly check yourvehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss ofpressure on several tires at the same timecannot be detected by the tire pressure losswarning system.

The tire pressure loss warning system is notable to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure,e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreignobject. In the event of a sudden loss ofpressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by brakingcarefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's

tires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style

(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the

vehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tire

pressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressures can befound in the table on the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tirepressure is set, these incorrect values willbe monitored.

X Observe the notes on tire pressure(Y page 301).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 (Y page 135) in the ignition lock.

Tire pressure 305

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Press = or ; on the steering wheelto select the Service menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press the a button.The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectYes.

X Press the a button.The Run Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

orIf you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message

appears, use the 9 or : button toselect Cancel.

X Press the a button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR of

your vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows the maximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

306 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight : is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible load is vehicle-specific andmay deviate from the data shown here. Themaximum permissible load that applies foryour vehicle can be found on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats : indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed to

travel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there are fiveoccupants in the vehicle each with a weightof 150 lbs, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailer

Loading the vehicle 307

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer tothis Operator's Manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle(Y page 310).

308 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard (Y page 307).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Loading the vehicle 309

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible load and trailer load/noseweight (maximum permissible load rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò750 lbs(340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò540 lbs(245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò150 lbs (68 kg)= 1350 lbs(612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 306).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usually between

10% and 15% of the gross weight of the trailerand its load.

Maximum load rating

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 306).

Maximum tire load : is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

310 Maximum load ratingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.Tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: tread wear :,tire traction ;, and heat resistance =.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundthe freezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 300) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road is

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 311

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

not covered with ice or snow. Takeappropriate care when driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labeling

The following markings are on the tire in additionto the tire name (sales designation) and themanufacturer's name:: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard

(Y page 316); DOT, Tire Identification Number

(Y page 315)= Maximum tire load (Y page 310)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 304)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 316)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 313)D Load index (Y page 315)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

312 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width : shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is thesize ratio between the tire height and the tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load bearing index: load bearing index Ais a numerical code which specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 306).Example:A load-bearing index of 91 indicates amaximum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can becarried by the tires. For further information onthe maximum tire load in kilograms andpounds, see (Y page 310).For further information on the load-bearingindex, see Load index (Y page 315).Speed rating: speed rating B specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully and

Tire labeling 313

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

adapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).The service specifications consist of loadbearing index A and speed rating B.RIf the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed ratingand the maximum speed of the tire islimited to 186 mph (300km/h).RThe size description for all tires with

maximum speeds of over 186mph(300km/h) must include "ZR", and the

service specification must be given inbrackets. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y).The speed rating "(Y)" indicates that themaximum speed of the tire is over 186mph(300km/h). Ask the tire manufacturerabout the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S6 up to 100mph (160 km/h)

T M+S6 up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H M+S6 up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V M+S6 up to 149mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.Winter tires have, in addition to the M+Sidentification, the i snow flake symbolon the tire sidewall. Tires with this markingfulfill the requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow. Theyhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph(210km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 323).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

6 Or M+Si for winter tires.

314 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex : may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed index B(Y page 313) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that

depends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Canadian tire regulations prescribe that everynew tire manufacturer or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers orretreaders to notify customers of recalls orother safety-related matters. It makes itpossible for the purchaser to easily identifythe affected tires.The TIN consists of the manufactureridentification code ;, tire size =, tire typecode ? and manufacturing date A.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol : indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the CanadianTransport Ministry.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code ; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.Further information about retreaded tires(Y page 298).Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code ? can beused by the manufacturer as a code todescribe specific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire labeling 315

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Tire characteristics

This information describes the tire cord andthe number of layers in sidewall : and undertire tread ;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires andloading

Tire ply composition and materialused

Describes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe Canadian Transport Ministry.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which thevehicle is designed multiplied by68 kilograms (150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

A uniform standard to grade the quality oftires with regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment

This is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

316 Definition of terms for tires and loadingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optional

equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is theequivalent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing the maximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 317

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These

optional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of theaccessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains the maximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit of á in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by thenumber of seats in the vehicle.

318 Definition of terms for tires and loadingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section(Y page 281). You will also find informationon driving with MOExtended tires in the eventof a flat tire.Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: inthe event of a flat tire, the emergency sparewheel is mounted as described under"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 319).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 319).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should beinterchanged every 3,000 to 6,000 miles(5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wearrequires. Do not change the direction ofwheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,

if necessary, restart the tire pressure losswarning system.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground.X Apply the electric parking brake manually

(Y page 150).X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

ahead position.X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position

P.

Changing a wheel 319

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.X If included in the vehicle equipment,

remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 280).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards :.X Fold out lower plate ;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into

the openings in base plate =.

Securing the vehicle on level ground

X On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: place

chocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

The following must be observed when raising the vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-

specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold

the vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and

downhill slopes.

320 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Neverdisengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar

objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between the

underside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under the

raised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid

when the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present in

the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thewheel housings of the front wheels and justin front of the wheel housings of the rearwheels (arrows).X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-

changing tool kit and place it on thehexagon nut of the jack so that the lettersAUF are visible.

X Position jack = at jacking point ;.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

Changing a wheel 321

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sitscompletely on jacking point ; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire israised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from theground.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a

dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 319).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou only use wheel bolts which have beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

322 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a

crosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: to A). The tightening torquemust be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle

tools in the vehicle again.X Check the tire pressure of the newly

mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 301).

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only

certain AMG tires)Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with a

load, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always bedetected on retreaded tires. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tires are mounted. Donot mount used tires if you have noinformation about their previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

with the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 301).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.

Wheel and tire combinations 323

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/

right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 281).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that youadditionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFITkit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kitmay be obtained from a qualified specialistworkshop.

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rim and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and theequipment installed at the factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

In the following table, the wheel/tirecombinations are assigned to the vehiclemodels through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

V1 B 2507

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

7 BlueEFFICIENCY

324 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tires

Summer tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 225/40 R18 92 W XL MOExtended8, 9 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

#

All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+SMOExtended8, 9 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

#

Winter tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+Si 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

#

BA 205/50 R17 93 H XLM+SiMOExtended9

6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

#

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or

emergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted onemergency spare wheels.

General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure asnecessary (Y page 301). The value on thewheel or as given in the "Technical data"section (Y page 323) is valid.

i When you are driving with the emergencyspare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system cannot functionreliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss

8 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with activated tire pressure loss

warning.

Emergency spare wheel 325

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

warning system when the defective wheelhas been replaced with a new wheel.

An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on theemergency spare wheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

Removing the emergency spare wheel

X Open the tailgate.X Loosen lashing straps ; on emergency

spare wheel bag :.X Remove emergency spare wheel bag :

with the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel.

For further information on changing andmounting a wheel, see (Y page 319).

Technical data

"Minispare"emergency sparewheel

Tires Steel wheel

T 125/80 R17 99 MTire pressure: 420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 17 H2ET 19.5

326 Emergency spare wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Useful information ............................ 328Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 328Warranty ............................................ 328Identification plates ......................... 328Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 329Vehicle data ...................................... 335

327

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Warranty

The Service and Warranty Informationbooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your vehicle.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and

Accessories warranties. You can obtaininformation about this from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service andWarranty Information booklet, have anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrangefor a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Example: vehicle identification plate; VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicleidentification plate is used only as anexample. This data is different for everyvehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the data

328 Identification platesTe

chni

cal d

ata

applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold up floor covering : in front of theright-hand front seat.You will see VIN ;.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield

(Y page 329)Ron the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 328)

Engine number

: Emissions control information plate; Engine number (stamped into the

crankcase)= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous andhazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approvedproducts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Service products and filling capacities 329

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical

assistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 13.2 US gal(50.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Approx.1.6 US gal

(6.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. The repaircosts are high. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.

! You should only refuel with unleadedpremium-grade gasoline as this avoidsdamaging the catalytic converter.If engine running problems are apparent,have the cause checked immediately andrepaired. Excess unburned fuel canotherwise enter the catalytic converter,leading to overheating and possiblycausing a fire.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline may be used.If there is no premium-grade unleadedgasoline available and regular unleadedgasoline must be used, please observe thefollowing precautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with

regular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration.

330 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.two passengers without luggage, do notallow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being

operated in mountainous terrain, do notdepress the accelerator pedal furtherthan Ô of the pedal travel.

Only refuel using premium-grade unleadedgasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/orunleaded gasoline with additives can be used.The concentration of additives in the fuel,however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should notexceed 15%.The concentration of methanol in gasoline,including other additives, must not exceed3%.Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is notpermitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanoland 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.All of these blends must fulfill the fuelrequirements, e.g.:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressureYou will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Information on refueling (Y page 147).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additives

can increase wear and tear to the fuelsystem high-pressure pump and lead to

contamination of the entire fuel system.The repair costs are high. This does notinclude additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Moreinformation about recommended additivescan be obtained from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

One of the main problems of poor fuel qualityis the forming of deposits that are createdduring the gasoline combustion process.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.If you use fuels without these additives overa longer period of time, carbon deposits maybuild up. These deposits form at the inletvalves and in the combustion chamber inparticular.This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:Rlonger engine warm-up phaseRuneven idleRengine noiseRmisfiringRloss of powerCarbon deposits may form if the availabilityof gasoline with relevant additives isinsufficient (in certain regions). In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends additivesapproved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.For a list of approved products, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel.Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. Thiscauses unnecessary costs and could damagethe engine.

Service products and filling capacities 331

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a

specification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, you may damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 329).The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY

270 229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry outregular oil changes using an approved engineoil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

332 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 329).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly ata qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you addantifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is notspilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

When handling coolant, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 329).The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY

Approx. 8.2 US qt(7.8 l)

Service products and filling capacities 333

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

i Use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitoraccording to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0.

Windshield washer system andheadlamp cleaning system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 329).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and washer fluid, e.g. MBWinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit with 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit with 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB

WinterFit with 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes

Type of refrigerantThe instruction label about types ofrefrigerants can be found on the radiatorcross member.

Refrigerant R-134a! Only use refrigerant R-134a and PAG oil

(part number A0019890803) which hasbeen approved by Mercedes-Benz. Theapproved R-134a PAG oil may not be mixedwith other conventional PAG oils.Otherwise, the climate control system maybe damaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate controlsystem carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

334 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

Warning symbols : indicate:Rpossible dangersRthat it is necessary to have maintenance

work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop

Filling capacities

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 650 ± 10 g(22.9 ± 0.4 oz)

PAG oil 120 g(4.2 oz)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result

of:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipment

Dimensions and weights

Model :

Maximumheadroom

;Openingheight

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY

73.8 in(1874 mm)

78.0 in(1981 mm)

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY

Vehicle length 171.6 in(4359 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

79.1 in(2010 mm)

Vehicle height 61.3 in(1558 mm)

Wheelbase 106.3 in(2699 mm)

Vehicle data 335

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY

Turning radius 36.1 ft(11.0 m)

Maximum roof load

165 lb(75.0 kg)

336 Vehicle dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mercedes-benz.ca

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOperator's Manual to the technicaldocumentation team at the followingaddress:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

As at 25.05.2012

Order no. 6515 1729 13 Part no. 246 584 00 00 Edition D 2013

É2465840000bËÍ2465840000

Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only